owner's manual operation maintenance...

F1

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that ourpolicy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla-nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may findmaterial in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's spe-cific warranty coverage.

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 7. As the owner, it is yourresponsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out atthe appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent main-tenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditionsare also included in Section 7.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

EN hma cover.qxd 11/27/2006 5:07 PM

F2

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect theperformance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulationsestablished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

!

F3

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

F4

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systemsthat help to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that youexpect. These systems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems andcomponents and help to control their operation. These computerized system operations arewide-ranging and involve components to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate thereadiness of the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag andseat belt pre-tensioner systems should be deployed and then to activate the deployment, andif equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, traction control and electronic stability control to assistthe driver to control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. These systems electronically storeinformation that is useful to service technicians when they need to diagnose and repair thesesystems. Additional information is stored only when a crash occurs that results in thedeployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage is done bydevices called event data recorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as theSupplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), mayrecord some information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. Thisinformation consists of data related to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic informationin the airbag or seat belt systems at the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed thata crash of sufficient severity occurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or shareit with others except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, oro with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

oro as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, oro as required by law.

F5

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction youreceive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.

A050A07A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meetthe specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2008 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor Company.

!

F6

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-tomers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not coveredunder the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty or any other Hyundai

warranty. In addition, any damage to orfailure of Hyundai Genuine Parts causedby the installation or failure of an imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage part isnot covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealercall 1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

F7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

F8

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I)

B250A01NF-AAT

ONF018001N

F9

1. Door lock/unlock button2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*3. Central door lock switch*4. Power window lock switch*5. Power window switches*6. Trunk lid release lever7. Fuel filler lid opener button8. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

10. Power Adjustable Pedals Switch*11. Steering wheel tilt12. Hood release lever13. Brake pedal14. Accelerator pedal15. Clutch pedal*16. Fuse box

* : if installed

F10

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II)

B250B01NF-AAT

ONF018002N

F11

1. Driver’s air bag2. Light control / Turn signals3. Instrument cluster4. Wiper/Washer5. Cruise control switch*6. Ignition switch7. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator8. Digital clock*9. Audio controls*10. Heating/Air conditioning control panel*

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

11. Hazard warning flasher switch12. Seat warmer*13. Shift lever14. Cigarette lighter15. Power outlet16. Ashtray17. Passenger’s air bag18. Vent controls19. Glove box

* : if installed

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

F12

B255A02NF-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

High Beam Indicator Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

Cruise Indicator Light

Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) IndicatorLights

Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Installed)

Cruise SET Indicator Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-50.

Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionTelltale (If Installed)

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8Windows ..................................................................... 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-14Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-21Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-26Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ........................................................... 1-34Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-48Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-50Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-58Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-60Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ........................ 1-63Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-69Mirror ........................................................................... 1-75Homelink Mirror ........................................................... 1-77Hood Release ............................................................. 1-87Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-91Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-96Antenna ..................................................................... 1-110Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-112Audio System............................................................ 1-115

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

!

B010A01NF-A

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problemsthat are caused by the use of fuels con-taining methanol or fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol)may be used in your Hyundai. However, ifyour engine develops driveabilityproblems, the use of 100% unleadedgasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, oralcohols other than ethanol, should not beused.

B010A02NF-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuelscontaining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary ButylEther) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content2.7% weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reducevehicle performance and produce vaporlock or hard starting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol)should not be used in your Hyundai. Thistype of fuel can reduce vehicleperformance and damage components ofthe fuel system.

!

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

WARNING:o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-

matically shuts off when refueling.o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise

the " " light will illuminate.o Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.


3KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel isavailable.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance perfor-mance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, you cancontribute to the economical operationand durability of your Hyundai by observingthe following recommendations during thefirst 1,200 miles (2,000 km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute) between2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try toavoid hard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words,don't drive so slowly in too high a gearthat the engine "bucks":shift to a lowergear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01NF-GAT

For greater convenience, your Hyundaihas two master keys and a sub key. Themaster keys will open all locks on yourvehicle. The sub key will only function inthe ignition and the door locks.

Leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant will ensure that your vehicle'strunk, trunk lid release, glove box compart-ment and rear trunk access may not beunlocked in your absence.

NOTE:Before leaving your sub key with aparking attendant, make sure that thelock knobs of the rear seatback lock andthe trunk lid lock are switched to the"LOCK" position.

B030A01NF-A

Master key

Sub key


4 DOOR LOCKS

!B040A01A-AATB030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

Whenever either front door is opened, theignition switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignition switchis not in the "ON" position.The light will go off approximately 10seconds after closing the door or when theignition switch is turned on.

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Before you drive away (especially ifthere are children in the car), be surethat all the doors are securely closedand locked so that the doors cannotbe opened from the inside. This helpsensure that the doors will not beopened accidentally. Also, whencombined with the proper use of seatbelts, locking the doors helps keepoccupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

B030B01NF-GAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is attached on the numbertag that came with the keys to your Hyundai.This key number tag should not be left withthe keys but kept in a safe place, not in thevehicle. The key number should also berecorded in a place where it can be foundin an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you shouldlose your keys, your authorized Hyundaidealer can make new keys if you cansupply the key number.

B030B01NF-A B030C01E


5

B040B01NF-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors witha key

o The door can be locked or unlockedwith a key.

o Lock the door by turning the key towardthe front of the vehicle and unlock it byturning the key toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked byturning the key once toward the rear. Ifyou wish to unlock all doors, turn the keyagain toward the rear within 4 seconds.

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking from the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key. Tolock the doors from the outside, first pushthe inside lock switch (1) to the "LOCK"position, so that the red mark on the switchis not visible, then close the door.The door will not lock if the key is left in theignition switch when the front doors areclosed. This is normal operation.

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be

careful not to lock the door with thekey left in the vehicle.

o To discourage theft, always removethe ignition key, close all windows andlock all doors when leaving your ve-hicle unattended.

ONF048005

LOCK

UNLOCK

ONF048006N

B040D01NF-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simplyclose the door and push the lock switch tothe "LOCK" position.

NOTE:o When the door is locked, the red mark

on the switch is not visible.o The driver's and front passenger's

doors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the insidelock switch is pushed to the "LOCK"position.

ONF048007N

LOCKUNLOCK


6

ONF048008N-2

ONF048008N-1

Driver's side

Front passenger's side

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.When the lock mechanism is engaged, therear door cannot be opened from the inside.Its use is recommended whenever thereare small children in the rear seat.

To engage the child-protector feature sothat the door cannot be opened from theinside, move the child-protector lever tothe " " position and close the door. Movethe lever to the " " position when normaldoor operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

B040G02NF-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is locatedon the driver's and front passenger'sarmrest. It is operated by depressing thedoor lock switch. If any door is open whenthe switch is depressed to the "LOCK"position, the door will remain locked whenclosed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion of

the driver's or front passenger's doorlock switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

o When depressing the rear portion ofthese switches, all vehicle doors willunlock.

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

!LOCK

UNLOCK

UNLOCKLOCK

HNF2011-1


7

! WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

o The driver's and front passenger'sdoors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the frontportion of the driver's or frontpassenger's central door lockingswitch has been depressed to lockthe doors.

o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-tiple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lockswitch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protect thecircuit and prevent damage to sys-tem components.

D050400ANF

Auto door lock/unlock feature(If Installed)

o All doors will be automatically lockedwhen shifting the transaxle shift leverout of P(Park).

o All doors will be automatically unlockedwhen shifting the transaxle shift leverinto P(Park).

NOTE:An authorized Hyundai dealer can acti-vate or deactivate the auto door lock/unlock features.If you want to activate or deactivate theauto door lock/unlock features, consultan authorized Hyundai dealer.

B070F02NF-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

!

ONF048011L

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.


8THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

This system is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the secondis the "Alarm" stage and the third is the"Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the systemprovides an audible alarm with blinking ofthe turn signal lights.

B070B02NF-AAT

Armed Stage

HMR

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

NOTE:The transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work cor-rectly, open and close the door with theignition key. If you have a problem withthe transmitter, contact an authorizedHyundai Dealer.

NOTE:Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK (1)" button on the trans-

mitter.3. At the same time, all doors lock and the

turn signal lights will blink once toindicate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK (2)" button on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time, the driver's doorunlocks and the turn signal lights willblink twice to indicate that the system isdisarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all the doors, pressthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the trunk lid release button (3) on thetransmitter for longer than 1 second.


9

2) Make sure that the engine hood andtrunk lid are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system or key.

After completion of the steps above, theturn signal lights will blink once and thesystem will be armed.The system can also be armed by lockingthe doors with the key; however, the turnsignal lights are not operated.If any door, trunk lid or engine hood is notopened or the ignition key is not insertedin the ignition switch within 30 seconds,the system will be rearmed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system aspreviously described.

NOTE:Do not arm the system until all passen-gers have left the car. If the system isarmed while a passenger(s) remains inthe car, the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leaves thecar.

B075D01CM-AAT

Disarmed StageIf the following conditions are met, thesystem will be disarmed.o When the doors are unlocked with the

transmitter or the ignition key.After depressing unlock button, youmust open the doors within 30 secondsor all doors will automatically lock againand theft-alarm system will be armed.

o When the ignition switch is in the "ON"position.

The turn signal lights will blink twice whenthe door is unlocked with the transmitter.

The alarm will be deactivated when:o The lock/unlock button on the transmit-

ter is pressed.o The doors are unlocked with the igni-

tion key.o The ignition switch is in the "ON" posi-

tion for 30 seconds.

NOTE:When the system is disarmed while the"DOOR" button of the interior light isdepressed, the interior light will illumi-nate for 30 seconds.

B070C01NF-AAT

Alarm StageThe alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened withoutusing the transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The trunk lid is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and the turnsignal lights will blink continuously for 27seconds (This will repeat 2 times). To turnoff the system, unlock the door or trunk lidwith the transmitter or the ignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!


10

HNF2005

Battery

2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.

B070E01NF-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins toget weak, it may take several pushes onthe button to lock or unlock the doors, andthe LED will not light. Replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a coinas shown in the illustration.

ONF048120

B070E01NF-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the backsideof the transmitter.

2. At the same time, the alarm horn willsound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"button again on the backside of thetransmitter.

7B070E02NF-A


11WINDOWS

1. Driver's door power window switch2. Front passenger's door power window

switch3. Rear passenger's door power window

switch (left side)4. Rear passenger's door power window

switch (right side)5. Window lock switch

B060D01NF-GAT

ONF048012N-1


12

B060A01NF-GAT

POWER WINDOWS

The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Themain switches are located on the driver'sarmrest and control the front and rearwindows on both sides of the vehicle. Thewindows may be opened by depressingthe appropriate window switch and closedby pulling up the switch. To open the win-dow on the driver's side, press the switchhalfway down. The window moves as longas the switch is operated.

ONF048014N-1

Window lock (Driver's side)

ONF048015L

Auto Up/Down Window(Driver's side)

The auto up/down window is controlled bythe main switch on the driver's armrest.To fully open the window automatically,press the switch fully down. To fully closethe window automatically, pull the switchfully up. In automatic operation, the win-dow will fully open or close even if you letgo of the switch. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up or depress and releasethe switch to the opposite direction of themovement.

NOTE:If the battery has been recharged ordisconnected, the auto up/down windowsystem must be reset as follows;

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position.2. Pull up the driver's window switch

until the window is fully closed andcontinue pulling up the driver's win-dow switch for at least 0.2 second.

If the auto up/down window is not reset,the feature may not operate properly.

Open

Close

In order to prevent operation of thepassenger front and rear windows, awindow lock switch is provided on thearmrest of the driver's door. To disable thepower windows, press the window lockswitch. To revert to normal operation, pressthe window lock switch a second time.


13

!

! WARNING:o Passengers can be injured if their

head, hands or other body parts aretrapped by a closing window. Alwayscheck for obstructions before raisingany window.

o NEVER leave the ignition key in thevehicle.

o NEVER leave any child unattended inthe vehicle. Even very young childrenmay inadvertently cause the vehicleto move, entangle themselves in thewindows, or otherwise injurethemselves or others.

o Do not attempt to operate the mainswitch on the driver's door and aswitch on another door in opposingdirections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and cannotbe opened or closed.

WARNING:o The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active whenthe “auto up” feature is used by fullypulling up the switch. The automaticreverse feature will not operate if thewindow is raised using the halfwayposition on the power window switch.

o Always check for obstructions beforeraising any window to avoid injuries orvehicle damage. If an object less than0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter is caughtbetween the window glass and theupper window channel, the automaticreverse window may not detect theresistance and will not stop andreverse direction.

B060C02NF-AAT

Automatic Reverse Window(Driver's side)

If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body, thewindow will detect the resistance and willstop upward movement. The window willthen lower approximately 11.8 in.(30cm)to allow the object to be cleared.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"positions, or removed from the ignitionswitch.If the front doors are opened during this30 second period, the power windowscan no longer be operated without theignition key turned to the "ON" position.


14

!B080B03A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward andRearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear,pull the lock release lever upward. This willrelease the seat on its track so you canmove it forward or rearward to the desiredposition. When you find the position youwant, release the lever and slide the seatforward or rearward on its track until it locksinto the desired position and cannot bemoved further.

WARNING:After adjusting the seat, always checkthat it is securely locked into place byattempting to move the seat forward orrearward without using the lock releaselever. Sudden or unexpected movementof the driver's seat could cause you tolose control of the vehicle resulting in anaccident.

SEATS

B080A02A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

! WARNING:o Never adjust the driver’s seat while

the vehicle is moving. Any sudden orunexpected movement of the seatcould cause you to lose control of thevehicle resulting in an accident. Onlyadjust the driver’s seat when thevehicle is stationary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat so thatyou can sit as far back as possiblefrom the airbag and still comfortablyreach all controls.

ONF038002


15

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward totake your weight off it, then pull up on therecliner control lever at the outside edge ofthe seat. Now lean back until the desiredseatback angle is achieved. To lock theseatback into position, release the reclinercontrol lever.

ONF038003

! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properly belted, andwith the seatbacks upright.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lowerthe headrest, push it down while pressingthe lock knob. To remove the headrest,raise it as far as it can go then press the lockknob while pulling upward. This shouldonly be done when the seat is not occupied.

B080D01NF

Lock knob


16

B083D01NF-AAT

Active Headrests

The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's and frontpassenger's head from moving backwardand thus helps prevent neck injuries.

B081D01NF-AAT

Adjusting Headrest Forward andRearward

The headrest may be adjusted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the headrestrearward, pull it fully forward to the farthestposition and release it. Adjust the headrestso that it properly supports the head andneck.

ONF038005

HNF2041-1

! WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the headrestis at the same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as injury to theoccupants may occur in the event ofan accident. Headrests may provideprotection against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height whilethe vehicle is in motion.

B080D01JM


17

B080E01Y-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To adjust the lumbar support, turn thehandle on the outboard or left side of theseat. To increase the amount of lumbarsupport, pull the lever forward. To decreaseit, push the lever toward the rear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

ONF038006

2

!

B090A02Y-AAT

POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If Installed)

The driver's seat can be adjusted by usingthe control knobs on the left side of the seat.Before driving, adjust the seat to the properposition so as to easily control the steeringwheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the sametime.

WARNING:o Never adjust a driver’s seat while the

vehicle is moving. Any sudden orunexpected movement of the seatcould cause you to lose control of thevehicle resulting in an accident. Onlyadjust the driver’s seat when thevehicle is stationary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat so thatyou can sit as far back as possiblefrom the airbag and still comfortablyreach all controls.

!

B080F01NF-GAT

Seat Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only)

To raise or lower the seat, raise or lower thecontrol lever to the desired seat height.

ONF038004

1


18

B090D01NF-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Pull the upper portion of the control knobforward or rearward to recline the seatbackto the desired position. Release the controlknob and the seatback will remain in thatposition.

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

Move the front portion of the control knobup or down to raise or lower the front partof the seat cushion. Move the rear portionof the control knob up or down to raise orlower the rear part of the seat cushion.

HNF2038 HNF2037

B090B01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear-ward

Pull the control knob forward or rearwardto move the seat forward or rearward to thedesired position. Release the control knoband the seat will remain at that position.

HNF2036


19

! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properly belted, andwith the seatbacks upright.

B100A01NF-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The seat warmer is provided to warm thefront seats during cold weather. With theignition key in the "ON" position, pusheither of the switches to warm the driver'sseat or the front passenger's seat.During mild weather or under conditionswhere the operation of the seat warmer isnot needed, keep the switches in the "OFF"position.o Each time you push the button, the

temperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows:

ONF038007

o The seat warmer defaults to the OFFposition whenever the ignition switch isturned on.

NOTE:o The seat warmer may not operate if

the ambient temperature is warm.o If the seat warmer doesn't operate

when the ambient temperature islower than 75°F (24°C), it must bechecked at an authorized dealer.

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )

→

! WARNING:Do not turn on the seat warmers, if theseat is occupied by someone who cannotmonitor the temperature and turn off theseat warmer, if it becomes too warm.The seat warmers should not be turnedon when children, the elderly, ill people,and sleeping people occupy the seat.


20

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higherthan the top of the seatback. In addition,do not place objects on the rear shelf asthey may move forward during brakingor in an accident and may strike andinjure vehicle passengers.

B140A01NF-A

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise beaccommodated. Do not allowpassengers to sit on top of the foldeddown seatback, while the car is movingas this is not a proper seating positionand no seat belts are available for use.This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or suddenstop. Objects carried on the folded downseatback should not extend higher thanthe top of the front seats. This could allowcargo to slide forward and cause injuryor damage during sudden stops.

B110A01NF-GAT

FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS

o To unlock the seatback, pull theseatback release lever, then pull for-ward on the seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure it haslocked into position by pulling andpushing on the top of the seatback.

B110A01NF


21SEAT BELTS

B150B04Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properly placedand installed in the rear seat. Informationabout the use of these restraints begins onpage 1-26.

!

B150A02S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must weartheir seat belts at all times. Seat beltsand child restraints reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries for all occupantsin the event of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupants could beshifted too close to a deploying airbag,strike the interior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle. Properly worn seatbelts greatly reduce these hazards. Evenwith advanced airbags, unbeltedoccupants can be severely injured by adeploying airbag. Always follow theprecautions about seat belts, airbagsand occupant safety contained in thismanual.

! WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. Never hold a childin your arms or lap when riding in avehicle. The violent forces createdduring a crash will tear the child fromyour arms and throw the child againstthe interior. Always use a child restraintappropriate for your child's height andweight, see page 1-26.

NOTE:Small children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properly re-strained in the rear seat by a childrestraint system that meets therequirements of the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standards. Before buyingany child restraint system, make surethat it has a label certifying that it meetsFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See information beginningon page 1-28.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rearseat and use the available lap/shoulderbelts. The lap portion should be fastenedsnug on the hips and as low as possible.Check belt fit periodically. A child'ssquirming could put the belt out of position.Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they arerestrained by a proper restraint system inthe rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13)must be seated in the front seat, the childshould be securely restrained by theavailable lap/shoulder belt and the seatshould be placed in the rearmost position.Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child under the age of 13 in the frontseat. NEVER place a rear facing child seatin the front seat of a vehicle.


22

WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt causing seriousinternal injuries or the occupant's neckcould strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properly belted (seepage 1-24), and with the seatbacksupright.

!

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this isnecessary, you should consult a physicianfor recommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt. Thiscould increase the severity of injuries incase of an accident.

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achievemaximum effectiveness of the restraintsystem, all passengers should be sittingup and the front seats should be in anupright position when the car is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper protectionif the person is lying down in the rear seator if the front seat is in a reclined position.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance ofinjury in an accident. When a seat belt isused, the lap belt portion should be placedas low and snugly as possible on the hips,not across the abdomen. For specificrecommendations, consult a physician.


23

!

B160A02A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatbackwas folded down, be careful not todamage the seat belt webbing or buckle.Be sure that the webbing or buckle doesnot get caught or pinched in the rearseat. A seat belt with damaged webbingor buckle will not be as strong and couldpossibly fail during a collision or suddenstop, resulting in serious injury.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or damageof any kind. Parts of the system that aredamaged should be replaced as soon aspossible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. Ifbelts become dirty, they can be cleaned byusing a mild soap solution and warm water.Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasivesshould not be used because they maydamage and weaken the fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an accident.This should be done even if no damage isvisible. Additional questions concerningseat belt operation should be directed toyour Hyundai Dealer.

B170A02NF-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of 4 positions formaximum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is toonear your neck, you will not be getting themost effective protection. The shoulderportion should be adjusted so that it liesacross your chest and midway over yourshoulder nearest the door and not yourneck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into anappropriate position.To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. Tolower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

HNF2049-A


24

B180A02NF-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point Systemwith Emergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt portionis adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. If you lean forward in aslow, easy motion, the belt will extend andlet you move around. If there is a suddenstop or impact, however, the belt will lockinto position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

B180A01NF

NOTE:o If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull thebelt out and release it. Then you will beable to pull the belt out smoothly.

o If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned fromthe "OFF" position to the "ON" or"START" position, the seat belt warn-ing light will blink and the warningchime will sound for approximatelysix seconds to remind the driver tofasten the driver's seat belt.

!

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster tomake sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appropriateheight. Never position the shoulderbelt across your neck or face.Improperly positioned seat belts cancause serious injuries in an accident.

o Failure to replace seat belts after anaccident could leave you withdamaged seat belts that will notprovide protection in the event ofanother collision leading to personalinjury or death. Replace your seatbelts after being in an accident assoon as possible.

! WARNING:o Adjust the shoulder belt height when

you sit well back in the seat.o When adjusting the shoulder belt

height, grip the height adjuster buttonsecurely and slide the height adjusterup or down.


25

B190A02NF-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger andRear Seat 3-Point System withCombination Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of childrestraint systems. Although a combinationretractor is also installed in the frontpassenger seat position, Hyundai stronglyrecommends that children always be seatedin the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of thevehicle.This type of seat belt combines the featuresof both an emergency locking retractor seatbelt and an automatic locking retractor seatbelt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle. Whennot securing a child restraint, the seat beltoperates in the same way as the driver'sseat belt (Emergency Locking RetractorType). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of theseat belt is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. When the seat beltis fully extended from the retractor to allowthe installation of a child restraint system,the seat belt operation changes to allow thebelt to retract, but not to extend (AutomaticLocking Retractor Type). See page 1-33.

NOTE:o Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protectionfor seated passengers in eitheremergency or automatic lockingmodes, it is recommended that seatedpassengers use the emergencylocking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

o The front passenger's seat beltwarning light on the center fasciapanel blinks until the front passenger'sseat belt is fastened to remind thefront passenger to fasten the frontpassenger's seat belt, when theignition key is turned from the "OFF"position to "the "ON" or "START"position.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system pro-

tection, the seat belts must always beused whenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children age 12 and younger mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to ridein the front passenger seat. If a childover 13 must be seated in the frontseat, he/she must be properly beltedand the seat should be moved as farback as possible.

o Never wear the shoulder belt underyour arm or behind your back. Animproperly positioned shoulder beltcan cause serious injuries in a crash.The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over your shoulder acrossyour collarbone.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight andnot twisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!


26 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A01NF-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statisticsprovided by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should useone of the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properly placedand installed in the rear seat. You must usea commercially available child restraintsystem that meets the requirements of theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS). Child restraint systems aredesigned to be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor and/orISOFIX anchors (if installed).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seat andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manufacturerwhen installing the child restraint system.

The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automaticallydraw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to besure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01NF

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion aslow as possible and snugly across yourhips, not on your waist. If the lap belt islocated too high on your waist, it mayincrease the chance of injury in the eventof a collision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, one shouldbe over and the other under, as shown inthe illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01NF


27

! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never install achild or infant seat on the frontpassenger's seat. Should an accidentoccur and cause the passenger sideairbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Thus only usea child restraint in the rear seat of yourvehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle on a sunny day, even ifthe outside temperature does not feelhot. Be sure to check the seat coverand buckles before placing a childthere.

o When the child restraint system is notin use, store it in the trunk or fasten itwith a safety belt so that it will not bethrown forward in the case of a suddenstop or an accident.

o Children may be seriously injured orkilled by an inflating airbag. Allchildren, even those too large for childrestraints, must ride in the rear seat.

!WARNING:To reduce the chance or serious or fatalinjuries:o Children of all ages are safer when re-

strained in the rear seat. A child riding inthe front passenger seat can be force-fully struck by an inflating airbag result-ing in serious or fatal injuries.

o Always follow the instructions for instal-lation and use of the child restraint maker.

o Always make sure the child seat is se-cured properly in the car and your childis securely restrained in the child seat.

o Never hold a child in your arms or lapwhen riding in a vehicle. The violentforces created during a crash will tearthe child from your arms and throw thechild against the car’s interior.

o Never put a seat belt over yourself anda child. During a crash, the belt couldpress deep into the child causing seri-ous internal injuries.

o Never leave children unattended in avehicle – not even for a short time. Thecar can heat up very quickly, resulting inserious injuries to children inside. Evenvery young children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entanglethemselves in the windows, or lock them-selves or others inside the vehicle.

o Never allow two children, or any twopersons, to use the same seat belt.

o Children often squirm and repositionthemselves improperly. Never let achild ride with the shoulder belt undertheir arm or behind their back. Alwaysproperly position and secure childrenin rear seat.

o Never allow a child to stand-up orkneel on the seat or floor of a movingvehicle. During a collision or suddenstop, the child can be violently thrownagainst the vehicle's interior, resultingin serious injury.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over aseatback, it may not provide adequatesecurity in an accident.

o Seat belts can become very hot, es-pecially when the car is parked indirect sunlight. Always check seatbelt buckles before fastening themover a child.

o Always store or secure a child seat,even when it is not in use. During acollision or sudden stop, the child seatcould be thrown inside the vehicle.

! WARNING:


28

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.

B230C02NF

Rear seat package tray

Tether Strap

Child Restraint Hook Holders

B230C05A-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear seat package tray.

To install the child restraint seat

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.

B230C01NF

Tether Anchor Cover Child Re-straint Hook Holder

Hook Front of Vehicle

B230B01NF-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders forinstalling the child seat or infant seat.


29

!

For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap over thetop of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to thechild restraint hook holder and tightento secure the seat.

WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraintis not properly anchored. Alwaysfollow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

o Never mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a singlelower anchorage point. The increasedload caused by multiple seats maycause the tethers or anchorage pointsto break, causing serious injury ordeath.

B230D06E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seatwith the "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers makesafety seats that are labeled as ISOFIX orISOFIX-compatible child seats. Theseseats include two rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to two ISOFIXanchors at specific seating positions inyour vehicle. This type of child seateliminates the need to use seat belts toattach the child seat.ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is no ISOFIXanchor provided for the center rear seatingposition.

B230D01NF

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraintis not properly anchored. Alwaysfollow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

o Never install a child restraint usingthe ISOFIX anchors at the centerposition of the rear seat. In a crash,the ISOFIX anchors may break if a carseat is improperly placed in the centerposition resulting in serious or fatalinjuries. Only place a ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seat in the left orright out-board rear seating positions(as shown) to the appropriate ISOFIXanchors provided.

o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers oranchorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.


30

!

The ISOFIX anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.

B230D02NF

ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

B230D03NF

Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-structions to properly install safety seatswith ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatibleattachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX childrestraint seat, assure that the seat isproperly attached to the ISOFIX and tetheranchors. Also, test the safety seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat forward.Check to see if the anchors hold the seatin place.

!o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX”

system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latched se-curely in their seat belt buckles andthe seat belt webbing must be re-tracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching andtaking hold of unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates or tabsmay allow the child to reach theunretracted seat belts which mayresult in strangulation and a seriousinjury or death to the child in the childrestraint.

WARNING:

WARNING:A child can be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car and thechild is not properly restrained in thechild restraint. Always follow the childseat manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation and use.

! CAUTION:Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing toget scratched or pinched by the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX anchor during theinstallation.


31

B230G04Y-AAT

Child Restraint System Installationon Rear Seats

B230G01NF-B

On outboard rear seats

B235G02NF

On rear seat center position

To install a child restraint system in the rearseats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. Thiswill engage the seat belt retractor automaticlocking feature, which allows the seat beltto retract but not extend. Install the childrestraint system, buckle the seat belt andallow the seat belt to take up any slack.Make sure that the lap portion of the belt istight around the child restraint system andthe shoulder portion of the belt is positionedso that it cannot interfere with the child'shead or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged theAutomatic Locking feature by trying toextend webbing out of the retractor. If theretractor is in the Automatic Locking mode,the belt will be locked. After installation ofthe child restraint system, try to move it in alldirections to be sure the child restraintsystem is securely installed. If you need totighten the belt, pull more webbing towardthe retractor. When you unbuckle the seatbelt and allow it to retract, the retractor willautomatically revert back to its normalseated passenger Emergency Lockingusage condition.

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint canmove when your vehicle turns or stopssuddenly. A child can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the child restraint isnot properly anchored to the car,including setting the retractor to theAutomatic Locking mode.

o Do not install any child restraintsystem in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur and causethe passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill an infantor child seated in an infant or childseat. Therefore, only use a childrestraint system in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint

system in any seating position, readthe instructions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed, have the system checkedimmediately by your authorizedHyundai dealer.


32

!

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

B180B01NF-L

1

23

Driver's airbagPassenger'sairbag

WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

o The seatbelt must be worn correctly andadjusted to the proper position (seepages 1-23 and 1-26). Please read andfollow all of the important informationand precautions about your vehicle’soccupant safety features – includingseat belts and advanced airbags – thatare provided in this manual.

! CAUTION:Do not put anything near the buckle.Placing objects near the buckle can ad-versely affect the buckle pre-tensionerand may increase the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision.

If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on theaffected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Theirlocations are shown in the illustration:

B180B02NF-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioneris to make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certainfrontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seatbelts can be activated alone or, where thefrontal collision is severe enough, togetherwith the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into position.In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat beltinto tighter contact against the occupant'sbody. The buckle pre-tensioner (which isinstalled in the buckle) will also pull theseat belt into the buckle.

OMG035300


33

!o Be sure you and your passengers

always wear seat belts and wear themproperly.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front

passenger's pre-tensioner seat beltswill be activated in certain frontal col-lisions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated alone or, where thefrontal collision is severe enough,together with the airbags.The pre-tensioners will not beactivated if the seat belts are not beingworn at the time of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in thepassenger compartment. These arenormal operating conditions and arenot hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged periods.Wash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were acti-vated.

WARNING: ! CAUTION:o Because the sensor that activates

the SRS airbag is connected with thepre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition key hasbeen turned to the "ON" position, andthen it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is nomalfunction of the SRS airbag. If theSRS airbag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition key isturned to "ON", or if it blinks for asecond and remains illuminated afterilluminating for approximately 6 sec-onds, or if it illuminates while the ve-hicle is being driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-

ate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must be re-placed. All seat belts, of any type,should always be replaced after theyhave been worn during a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during acti-vation. Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies for several min-utes after they have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe pre-tensioner seat belts yourself.This must be done by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure toheed the warnings not to strike, modify,inspect, replace, service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt assembliesmay lead to improper operation orinadvertent activation and seriousinjury.

o Always wear the seat belts when driv-ing or riding in a motor vehicle.


34

B240D01NF-AAT

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM(SRS)

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Side impact airbag4. Curtain airbag

HNF2052


35

The SRS uses sensors to gatherinformation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's andfront passenger's seat belt usage andimpact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seattrack position sensors, which are installedon the seat track, determine if the seats arefore or aft of a reference position. The seatbelt buckle sensors determine if the driverand front passenger's seat belts arefastened. These sensors provide the abilityto control the SRS deployment based onhow close the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, how close the passenger's seat isto the instrument panel, whether or not theseat belts are fastened, and how severethe impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the airbag inflation with two levels.A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level isprovided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, seatingposition and seat belt usage, theSRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls theairbag inflation. Failure to properly wearseat belts can increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warninglight on the instrument panel willilluminate because the SRS airbagwarning light is connected with the seattrack position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated afterapproximately 6 seconds when the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

Additionally, your Hyundai is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupantclassification system detects the presenceof a passenger in the front passenger'sseat and will turn off the front passenger'sairbag under certain conditions. For moredetail, see "Occupant ClassificationSystem" later in this section.

B240A03NF-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's FrontAirbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with anadvanced Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System. The indications of thesystem's presence are the letters "SRSAIRBAG" embossed on the airbag padcover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad abovethe glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbagsinstalled under the pad covers in the centerof the steering wheel and the passenger'sside front panel above the glove box. Thepurpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passengerwith additional protection than that offeredby the seat belt system alone in case of afrontal impact of sufficient severity.

Driver's Front Airbag

ONF038013


36

!! WARNING:Always use seat belts and child restraints– every trip, every time, everyone!Airbags inflate with considerable forceand in the blink of an eye. Seat belts helpkeep occupants in proper position toobtain maximum benefit from the airbag.Even with advanced airbags, improperlybelted and unbelted occupants can beseverely injured when the airbag inflates.Always follow the precautions about seatbelts, airbags and occupant safetycontained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatalinjuries and receive the maximum safetybenefit from your restraint system:o Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat (seechild restraints 1-26).

o ABC – Always Buckle Children in theback seat. It is the safest place forchildren of any age to ride.

o Front and side impact airbags caninjure occupants improperlypositioned in the front seats.

o Move your seat as far back aspractical from the front airbags, whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.

o Never sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the front or side airbags.

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track positionsensor and cause the airbag to deployat a different level than should be pro-vided.

o Do not place any objects underneaththe front seats as they could damagethe seat track position sensor orinterfere with the occupantclassification system.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seat.These may cause a malfunction of theseat track position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the back-side of the sun visor.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in frontalcrashes. Front airbags are not intendedto deploy in collisions in which sufficientprotection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

o Never lean against the door or centerconsole – always sit in an upright posi-tion.

o Do not allow an adult passenger to ridein the front seat when the “PassengerAirbag OFF” indicator is illuminated,because the airbag will not deploy in theevent of a moderate or severe frontalcrash.

o Never place objects over or near anyairbag module (front or side impactairbags), because these objects caninjure passengers in a crash.

o Never place covers, blankets or after-market seat warmers on the passengerseat as these may interfere with theoccupant classification system.

o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS wiringor other components. Injuries couldresult from inadvertent deployment orfailure of the airbag to deploy in a crash.

o If the SRS airbag warning light (see pg1-50) remains illuminated while thevehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect theairbag system as soon as possible.

o Airbags can only be used once – havean authorized Hyundai dealer replacethe airbag immediately afterdeployment.

WARNING:


37

! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front airbags, whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbags. Improperly positioneddrivers and passengers can beseverely injured by inflating airbags.

o No objects should be placed over ornear the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to cause theairbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOTinflate again and will provide noprotection in subsequent collisions.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of theSRS system. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental deploymentof the airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

! WARNING:o The SRS is designed to deploy the

front airbags only when an impact issufficiently severe and when theimpact angle is less than 30° from theforward longitudinal axis of thevehicle. The front airbags will notdeploy in side, rear or rollover im-pacts. Additionally, the airbags willonly deploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

o Front airbags are not intended to de-ploy in side-impact, rear-impact orrollover crashes. In addition, frontairbags will not deploy in frontalcrashes below the deploymentthreshold.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the front seat.The infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o Children younger than 13 years mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to ridein the front passenger seat. If a childover 13 must be seated in the frontseat, he or she must be properly beltedand the seat should be moved as farback as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants in-cluding the driver should always weartheir seat belts whether or not anairbag is also provided at their seatingposition to minimize the risk of severeinjury or death in the event of a crash.Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag while the vehicle is inmotion.

B240A02NF

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover


38

12. Side Impact Airbag Module13. Curtain Airbag Module

The SRSCM continually monitors allelements while the ignition is "ON" todetermine if a frontal or near-frontal impactis severe enough to require airbagdeployment or pre-tensioner seat beltdeployment.

The SRS airbag warning light on the in-strument panel will illuminate for about 6seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position or after the engine isstarted, after which the airbag warninglight should go out.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should situpright with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the flooruntil the vehicle is parked and theignition key is removed.

o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection in acrash. If an occupant is out of positionbecause of not wearing a seat belt, theairbag may forcefully contact the oc-cupant causing serious or fatalinjuries.

B240B03NF-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS air bag warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor10. Side Impact Sensor11. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies

B240B01NF-B

B240B01L


39

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.

A fully inflated airbag, in combination witha properly worn seat belt, slows the driver'sforward motion, reducing the risk of headand chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbagimmediately starts deflating, enabling thedriver to maintain forward visibility and theability to steer or operate other controls.

B240B03L

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box.When the SRSCM detects a sufficientlysevere impact to the front of the vehicle, itwill automatically deploy the front airbags.

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accesso-

ries (drink holder, cassette holder,sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a vehiclewith a passenger's airbag. Such ob-jects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's airbag inflates.

o When installing a container of liquidair freshener inside the vehicle, donot place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface.If there is any leakage from the airfreshener onto these areas(instrument cluster, instrument panelor air ventilator), it may damage these

!

ONF038014

Passenger's Front Airbag


40

B990A02NF-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-TEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupantclassification system in the frontpassenger's seat.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not. Thedriver's front air bag is not affected orcontrolled by the occupant classificationsystem.

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines to beof adult size, and he/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in an upright

ONF038024N

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

!Always wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly with lukewarm water anda mild soap after an accident in whichthe airbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Ifthe SRS airbag warning light does notilluminate, or continuously remainson after illuminating for about 6seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, comes on whiledriving, the SRS is not workingproperly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or discon-nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion key to the "LOCK" position andremove the ignition key. Never removeor replace the airbag related fuse(s)when the ignition key is in the "ON"position. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS airbag warninglight to illuminate.

parts. If the liquid from the air fresh-ener does leak onto these areas, washthem with water immediately.

WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, there may be a

loud noise followed by a fine dustreleased in the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are nothazardous - the airbags are packed inthis fine powder. The dust generatedduring airbag deployment may causeskin or eye irritation as well asaggravate asthma for some persons.

WARNING:


41

!

position, centered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorwill be turned off and the front passenger'sair bag will be able to inflate, if necessary,in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator on the center facia panel.This system detects the conditions 1~4 inthe following table and activates ordeactivates the front passenger air bagbased on these conditions.

Condition and operation in the front pas-senger occupant classification system

*1)The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adultsits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as achild depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2)Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. When a larger childwho has outgrown a child restraintsystem sits in the front passenger seat,the system may recognize him/her asan adult depending on his/her phy-sique or posture.

*3)Never install a child restraint system onthe front passenger seat.

WARNING:Riding in an improper position or placingweight on the front passenger's seatwhen it is unoccupied by a passengeradversely affects the occupantclassification system (OCS).

o Never place feet on the frontpassenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

o Never put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seat or seatback pocket.

OVQ036013N

Frontpassenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

Conditiondetected bythe occupantclassification

system1. Adult*1

2. Child*2 orchild restraintsystem*3

3. Unoccupied4. There is a

malfunctionin thesystem

SRSwarning

light

Off

Off

Off

On

"Passengerair bag off"

indicator light

Off

On

On

Off


42

When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to sitproperly (sitting upright with the seat backin an upright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet on thefloor). Restart the engine and have theperson remain in that position. This willallow the system to detect the person and toenable the passenger air bag.

o Never excessively recline the frontpassenger seatback.

1KMN3665

1KMN3662

o Never place feet on the dashboard.o Never sit with hips shifted towardsthe front of the seat.

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

o Never lean on the center console.o Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

Proper position

B990A01O


43

!

!

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates for about 4 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the frontpassenger after several more seconds.

! WARNING:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS air bagwarning light on the instrument panel willilluminate because the passenger's frontair bag is connected with the occupantclassification system. If there is a mal-function of the occupant classificationsystem, the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator will not illuminate and thepassenger's front air bag will inflate infrontal impact crashes even if there is nooccupant in the front passenger's seat.If the SRS air bag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position, remains illumi-nated after approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, have an au-thorized Hyundai dealer inspect the oc-cupant classification system and theSRS air bag system as soon as possible.

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-tor is still on, ask the passenger to move tothe rear seat.

WARNING:Do not allow an adult passenger to ridein the front seat when the “PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF” indicator is illuminated,because the airbag will not deploy in theevent of a crash. If the "PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF" indicator remainsilluminated after the passenger reposi-tions themselves properly and the car isrestarted, Hyundai recommends thatpassenger move to the rear seatbecause the passenger's front airbagwill not deploy.The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator will not change according tothe occupants posture after the vehiclehas been running for 30 seconds. Frontseat passengers must stay properlyseated to avoid serious injury from adeploying airbag. For more informationsee page 1-42.

WARNING:Do not put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seatback pocket or on thefront passenger seat. Do not hang ontothe front passenger seat. Do not hangany items such as seatback table on thefront passenger seatback. Do not placefeet on the front passenger seatback.Do not place any items under the frontpassenger seat. Any of these couldinterfere with proper sensor operation.


44

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, never install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger's seat.A deploying air bag can forcefullystrike a child resulting in seriousinjuries or death. Any child age 12 andunder should ride in the rear seat.Children too large for child restraintsshould use the available lap/shoulderbelts. No matter what type of crash,children of all ages are safer whenrestrained in the rear seat.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by anadult and he/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor),have that person sit in the rear seat.

o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blanketor after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This canadversely affect the occupantclassification system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such as toolswhen occupying the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

o Do not use accessory seat covers onthe front seats.

o Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in therear, as opposed to the front seat. It isrecommended that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat andan older child riding in a booster seat.

o Air bags can only be used once – havean authorized Hyundai dealer replacethe air bag immediately afterdeployment.

o A smaller-stature adult who is not seatedcorrectly (for example: seat excessivelyreclined, leaning on the center console,or hips shifted forward in the seat) cancause a condition where the advancedfrontal air bag system senses lessweight than if the occupant were seatedproperly (sitting upright with the seatbackin an upright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet onthe floor). This condition can result in anadult potentially being misclassified andillumination of the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator.

B990B05Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a sideimpact airbag in each front seat. Thepurpose of the airbag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passengerwith additional protection than that offeredby the seat belt alone. The side impactairbags are designed to deploy only duringcertain side-impact collisions, dependingon the crash severity, angle, speed andpoint of impact. The side impact airbagsare not designed to deploy in all sideimpact situations.

B990B02LZ


45

!o For best protection from the side im-

pact airbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side impactairbag, both front seat occupantsshould sit in an upright position withthe seat belt properly fastened. Thedriver's hands should be placed onthe steering wheel at the 9:00 and3:00 positions. The passenger's armsand hands should be placed on theirlaps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or

prevent the effectiveness of the sys-tem.

o Do not install any accessories on theside or near the side impact airbag.

o Do not place any objects over theairbag or between the airbag andyourself.

o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door andthe front seat. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental sideimpact airbag inflates.

o To prevent unexpected deploymentof the side impact airbag that mayresult in personal injury, avoid impactto the side impact sensor when theignition key is on.

WARNING:

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is

supplemental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systems and isnot a substitute for them. Thereforeyour seat belts must be worn at alltimes while the vehicle is in motion.The airbags deploy only in certainside impact conditions severe enoughto cause significant injury to thevehicle occupants.

!

ONF038022

Side impactsensor

B990C01LZ-GAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants and therear outboard seat occupants in certainside impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to deployonly during certain side impact collisions,depending on the crash severity, angle,speed and impact. The curtain airbags arenot designed to deploy in all side impactsituations, collisions from the front or rearof the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

HLZ2051

Curtain Airbag


46

o If the airbags inflate, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of theSRS system. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental inflation ofthe airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

o If components of the airbag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. YourHyundai dealer knows these precau-tions and can give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to follow theseprecautions and procedures could in-crease the risk of personal injury.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on flooring, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

! WARNING:

B240C03NF-AAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free andso there are no parts you can safely serviceby yourself. If the SRS airbag warning lightdoes not illuminate, or continuously re-mains on, have your vehicle immediatelyinspected by your Hyundai dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performedby a qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the SRS system may result inserious personal injury.

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system

in the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat. The infantor child could be severely injured byan airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components orwiring, including the addition of anykind of badges to the pad covers ormodifications to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS perfor-mance and lead to possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or one whichhas been moistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners could adverselyaffect the airbag covers and properdeployment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over ornear the airbag modules on thesteering wheel, instrument panel, andthe front passenger's panel abovethe glove box, because any suchobject could cause harm if the vehicleis in a crash severe enough to causethe airbags to inflate.

!

HSM393


47

B240D02NF-AAT

Additional Safety Precautions

o Never let passengers ride in the cargoarea (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing aseat belt during a crash or emergencystop can be thrown against the inside ofthe vehicle, against other occupants, orout of the vehicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrainone occupant. If more than one personuses the same seat belt, they could beseriously injured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve oc-cupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection providedby the seat belt and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselvesand the airbags. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap or in your mouth canresult in injuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seatbelts on and their feet on the floor. Ifoccupants are too close to the airbagcovers, they could be injured if theairbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on ornear the airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front or sideimpact airbag covers could interferewith the proper operation of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifi-cation of the front seats could interferewith the operation of the supplementalrestraint system sensing componentsor side impact airbags.

o Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the operationof the supplemental restraint systemsensing components and wiringharnesses.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can cause occupants to be shifted tooclose to a deploying airbag, strike theinterior structure or be thrown fromthe vehicle resulting in serious injuryor death.

o Always sit upright with the seatbackin an upright position, centered on theseat cushion with your seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and yourfeet on the floor.

o Never hold an infant or child on yourlap. The infant or child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in the event of a crash.All infants and children should beproperly restrained in appropriate childsafety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Adding Equipment to or ModifyingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system, frontend or side sheet metal or ride height, thismay affect the operation of your vehicle'sairbag system.


48 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATORLIGHTS

B260A02NF-AAT

ONF048038N


49

1. Tachometer2. Low Tire Pressure Telltale3. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Telltale4. Door Ajar Warning Light5. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)6. High Beam Indicator Light7. Turn Signal Indicator Lights8. Speedometer9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights

(If Installed)10. Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Installed)11. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)12. Coolant Temperature Gauge

13. Fuel Gauge14. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light15. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light16. Charging System Warning Light17. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light18. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)19. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light20. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If Installed)21. Odometer/ Trip Odometer/ Trip Computer (If Installed)22. CRUISE Indicator Light23. Cruise SET Indicator Light24. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light25. Low Fuel Warning Light


50 WARNING AND INDICATORLIGHTS

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS warning light comes on for about6 seconds after the key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, afterwhich it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS isnot working properly. If the airbag warninglight does not come on, or continuouslyremains on after operating for about 6seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have theSRS inspected by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on theinstrument panel show the directionindicated by the turn signals. If the arrowcomes on but does not blink, blinks morerapidly than normal, or does not illuminateat all, a malfunction in the turn signal systemis indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

B265E01TG-AAT

Seat Belt Warning Light andChime (Driver's Side)

*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withinterval 24 seconds. If the driver's seatbelt is buckled, the light will stop within6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-ately.

*2) The light will stop within 6 seconds andchime will stop immediately.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound

Unbuckled

Buckled

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph(10 km/h)

↓Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds

6 seconds None

6 seconds

6 seconds *1)

↓Stop *2)

6 seconds None

The front passenger's seat belt warninglight will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Seat Belt Warning Light(Front Passenger's Side)

*1) The seat belt warning light will go off ifthe vehicle speed decreases below 3mph (5 km/h). And if the vehicle speedincreases above 3 mph (5 km/h), thewarning light will blink again.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink

Unbuckled

Buckled

6 seconds

Continuously

6 seconds

Continuously *1)

None

UnbuckledAbove 6mph

(10 km/h)

Buckled →→→→→

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

Below 6mph(10 km/h)

Buckled →→→→→

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph(5 km/h)

3 mph~6 mph

Above 6 mph(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off(11 times)


51

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes onwhenever the headlights are switched tothe high beam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure WarningLight

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stayson while the engine is running, seriousengine damage may result. The oil pres-sure warning light comes on wheneverthere is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-mal operation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If the oilpressure warning light stays on whilethe engine is running, there is a seriousmalfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so, turn off the engine andcheck the oil level. If the oil level is low,fill the engine oil to the proper level andstart the engine again. If the light stayson with the engine running, turn the en-gine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when theengine is running, the engine should bechecked by a Hyundai dealer before thecar is driven again.

!

B260A01Y-GAT

Front Fog Light Indicator Light(If Installed)

This fog indicator light comes on when theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionand the front fog light switch is on.

NOTE:o You can find the front passenger's

seat belt warning light on the centerfascia panel.

o Although the front passenger seat isnot occupied, the seat belt warninglight will blink for 6 seconds.

o The seat belt warning light can blinkwhen a briefcase or purse is placedon the front passenger seat.

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car witha problem in either the brake electricalsystem or brake hydraulic system isdangerous, and could result in a seriousinjury or death.

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid levelwarning light should come on when theparking brake is applied and the ignitionswitch is turned to "ON" or "START". Afterthe engine is started, the light should goout when the parking brake is released.If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START",then go out when the engine starts. If thelight comes on at any other time, you shouldslow the vehicle and bring it to a completestop in a safe location off the roadway.


52

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime

The door ajar warning light warns you thata door is not completely closed and thechime warns you that the key is in theignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only soundswhenever the key is in the ignition switchand the driver's side front door is opensimultaneously. The chime sounds untilthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch or the driver's side front door isclosed.

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is approaching empty.When it comes on, you should add fuel assoon as possible. Driving with the fuellevel warning light on or with the fuel levelbelow "E" can cause the engine to misfireand damage the catalytic converter.

B260N02A-AAT

Check Engine - MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL)

This light illuminates when there is amalfunction of an exhaust gas relatedcomponent, and the system is notfunctioning properly so that the exhaustgas regulation values are not satisfied. Thislight will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go outin a few seconds after the engine is started.If it illuminates while driving, or does notilluminate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, take your car to yournearest authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.

The brake fluid level warning light indicatesthat the brake fluid level in the brake mastercylinder is low and hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationsshould be added. After adding fluid, if noother trouble is found, the car should beimmediately and carefully driven to aHyundai dealer for inspection. If furthertrouble is experienced, the vehicle shouldnot be driven at all but taken to a dealer bya professional towing service.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This meansyou still have braking on two wheels evenif one of the dual systems should fail. Withonly one of the dual systems working,more than normal pedal travel and greaterpedal pressure are required to stop thecar. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you aredriving, shift to a lower gear for additionalengine braking and stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so.

B260J01NF-AAT

Charging System WarningLight

The charging system warning light shouldcome on when the ignition is turned on,then go out when the engine is running. Ifthe light stays on while the engine isrunning, there is a malfunction in theelectrical charging system. If the light comeson while you are driving, have the systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

B260K01S-AAT

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the trunk lid iscompletely closed and latched.


53

!

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position,the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on whiledriving, or does not come on when the keyis turned to the "ON" position, this indicatesthat there may be a problem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible. The normal braking system willstill be operational, but without theassistance of the anti-lock brake system.

WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain"ON" or come on while driving, theremay be a problem with E.B.D. (ElectronicBrake Force Distribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B265C01NF-AAT

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Lights(If Installed)

The electronic stability control indicatorschange operation according to the ignitionswitch position and whether the system isin operation or not.They will illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, but should goout after three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-OFF indicator stays on, take your car toyour authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked. See section 2 formore information about the ESC.

B260Q02NF-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light

The cruise indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button on the steeringwheel is pulled.The indicator light turns off when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button is pushed again.Information about the use of cruise controlbegins on page 1-91.

B260R01NF-GAT

Cruise SET Indicator Light

The Cruise SET indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol "COAST/SET" or "RES/ACCEL" switchis pushed. The Cruise SET indicator lightdoes not illuminate when the cruise control"CANCEL" switch is pushed or the system isdisengaged. To disengage the cruise controlsystem, refer to "To cancel the cruise speed"on page 1-92.B260S01NF-GAT

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel Warning Light

The low windshield washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the washer fluid reservoir isapproaching empty. When it comes on, addwasher fluid at your earliest opportunity.

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNINGSOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when new padsare needed. The sound may come and go orbe heard all the time when the vehicle ismoving. It may also be heard when the brakepedal is pushed down firmly. Excessive rotordamage will result if the worn pads are notreplaced. See your Hyundai dealer immedi-ately.


54

!

! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contributeto loss of vehicle control and increasedbraking distances.Continued driving on low pressure tireswill cause the tires to overheat and fail.

B260W02JM-GAT

Low tire pressure telltale

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, theTire Pressure Monitoring System is notworking properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate if oneor more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible. If the warninglight illuminates while driving, reducevehicle speed immediately and stop thevehicle. Avoid hard braking and overcor-recting at the steering wheel. Inflate thetires to the proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.After adjusting the tire pressure of eachwheel correctly, if the low pressure telltalelight stays “ON” continuously, the TirePressure Monitoring System is not workingproperly. If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B265W02JM-GAT

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-toring System) malfunctionindicator

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. If the warning light doesnot come on, or continuously remains onafter coming on for about 3 seconds whenyou turned the ignition key to the "ON"position, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem is not working properly. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible.The warning light also comes on and stayson when there is a problem with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not monitorthe tire pressure. Have the system checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severe

and sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-mediately take your foot off theaccelerator and slowly move to a safeposition off the road.


55

!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and causesevere burns. Wait until the engine iscool before adding coolant to thereservoir.

The normal range is approximately in themiddle between "H" and "C". If it movesacross the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off theengine. Then open the hood and, after theengine has cooled, check the coolant level(See "If the engine overheats" on the page3-4.) and the water pump drive belt. If yoususpect cooling system trouble, have yourcooling system checked by a Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

ONF048043N

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01NF-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank. Thefuel capacity is given in section 9.

NOTE:The " " symbol means, the fuel fillerlid is located on the left side of the ve-hicle.

ONF048044N


56

B300A02A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibratedin miles per hour and kilometers per hour.

ONF048040N

B310B01NF-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total distancetraveled in miles. You will also find theodometer useful to determine whenperiodic maintenance should beperformed.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the mileage registered on theodometer. The alteration may void yourwarranty coverage.

ONF048051N

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to sucha speed that the needle enters the redzone on the tachometer face. This cancause severe engine damage and mayvoid your warranty coverage.

!

ONF048042N


57

ONF048048N ONF048050

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press theTRIP switch.

TRIP A: Distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a firstdestination.

TRIP B: Distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.

When the RESET switch is pressed for 1second, the trip odometer will reset to 0.

Pushing in the TRIP switch behind the leftside of the steering wheel when the igni-tion switch is turned "ON" will display twotrip odometers in miles.

ONF048049

2. Trip Odometer(Without Trip Computer)


58

Pushing in the TRIP switch when the ignitionswitch is in "ON" position changes thedisplay as follows;

ONF048049

TRIP SWITCH RESET SWITCH

Push in the RESET switch more than 1second to initialize the displayed informa-tion such as tripmeter, average fuel con-sumption and drive time.

ONF048050

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01NF-AAT

(If Installed)The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to driving, suchas estimated tripmeter, drive time, averagefuel consumption and distance to emptyon the LCD.

TRIPMETER A

TRIPMETER B

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

DRIVE TIME


59

2. Distance to Empty (Miles)

o When the remaining distance is below30 miles (50 km), “---” will be displayedand the distance to empty indicator willblink.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according todriving conditions.

o The distance to empty can vary ac-cording to the driving conditions, driv-ing pattern or vehicle speed.

o This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty from the current fuellevel in the fuel tank.

o The trip computer may not register ad-ditional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

ONF048054N

ONF048053N

1. Tripmeter (Miles)

o This mode indicates the total distancetravelled since the last tripmeter reset.Total distance is also reset to zero if thebattery is disconnected.

o Pressing the RESET switch for morethan 1 second, when the tripmeter isbeing displayed, clears the tripmeter tozero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to999.9 miles.

ONF048048N


60 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upwards on the lever causes theturn signals on the right side of the car toblink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the centerposition and turn off the turn signals at thesame time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goeson but does not blink, or does not go on atall, there is a malfunction in the system.Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or seeyour Hyundai dealer.

4. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the total time fromthe starting of the engine to the ignitionkey "OFF" after resetting. When theRESET switch is pushed, it will beinitialized to '0:00'. If the ignition switchis turned to OFF for more than 2 hours,it will be reset automatically.

o The drive time will be initialized to '0:00'after being displayed to '99:59'.

ONF048055N

3. Average Fuel Consumption (MPG)

o This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel usedand the distance since the last averageconsumption reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from thefuel consumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero if the battery is disconnected.

o To reset the average fuel consumptionto zero (--), press the RESET switch formore than 1 second. If the fuel is refilledmore than 1.36 gallons (6 liters), it willbe reset automatically.

o When you drive 0.5 mile and less afterresetting, the average fuel consumptionwill be displayed to '--'.

ONF048122N


61

B340C04A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrelon the end of the multi-function switch. Thefirst position turns on the parking lights,sidelights, tail lights and instrument panellights. The second position turns on theheadlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

ONF048060

Parking Light Auto Off

o The purpose of this feature is to preventthe battery from being discharged. Thesystem automatically turns off the head-lights and parking lights when the driverremoves the ignition key and opens thedriver-side door.

o With this feature, the parklight will beturned off automatically if the driver parkson the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights on whenthe ignition key is removed, perform thefollowing :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to a point where it beginsflashing.The lever will automatically return to thecenter position when released.

ONF048064


62

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. Theheadlights can be flashed even though theheadlight switch is in the "OFF" position.

ONF048062

B340G01LZ-AAT

Auto Light (If Installed)

ONF048061

To operate the automatic light feature, turnthe barrel on the end of the multi-functionswitch. If you set the multi-function switchto "AUTO", the tail lights and headlightswill be turned automatically on or off ac-cording to external illumination conditions.

NOTE:Turn the lights manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, pushthe lever forward (away from you). TheHigh Beam Indicator Light will come on atthe same time. For low beams, pull thelever back toward you.

ONF048063


63WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removedmanually. If there is only a light layer ofsnow or ice, operate the heater in thedefrost mode to melt the snow or icebefore using the wiper.

ONF048066N

(1)

(2)

(3)

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360B01L-AAT

(If Installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, place theswitch (1) in the "ON" position. They willlight when the headlight switch is in thesecond position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,the front fog lights will be turned off.

ONF048065

NOTE:o Never place anything over the sensor

(1) located on the instrument panel toensure better auto light system con-trol.

o Don't clean the sensor using a win-dow cleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the windshield, theAUTO light system may not work prop-erly.


64

B350C01NF-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent WiperOperation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the intervalbetween wipes can be varied fromapproximately 1 to 18 seconds by turningthe interval adjuster barrel (1).

ONF048066N

ONF048066N

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist,push the windshield wiper and washercontrol lever upwards.

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel. When the washer lever is operated,the wipers automatically make two passesacross the windshield. The washercontinues to operate until the lever isreleased.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than

15 seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to theglass prior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

ONF048068


65

ONF048071N

ONF048072

NOTE:The engine must be running for the rearwindow defroster to operate.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damageto the defroster elements.

!B380A02NF-AAT

The rear window defroster switch alsoactivates the outside rearview mirrorheaters.The rear window defroster and heatedoutside rearview mirrors are turned on bypushing in the switch. To turn the defrosteroff, push the switch a second time. The rearwindow defroster automatically turns itselfoff after about 20 minutes. To restart thedefroster cycle, push in the switch againafter it has turned itself off.

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

With Manual A/C

With Automatic A/C

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location. Whenyou must make such an emergency stop,always pull off the road as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causesall turn signal lights to blink. The hazardwarning lights will operate even thoughthe key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, pushthe switch a second time.

ONF048057


66 INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be madebrighter or dimmer by turning the instrumentpanel light control knob.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all theway into its socket. When the element hasheated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready"position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin. This can damage the heating elementand create a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine Hyundaireplacement or its approved equivalent.

! CAUTION:Do not use electric accessories or equip-ment other than the Hyundai genuineparts in the socket.

ONF048039N

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01NF-GAT

There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.

M - Push "M" to advance the minuteindicated.

Display conversion- To change the 12 hour format to the

24 hour format, press the “H” and “M”buttons at the same time for morethan 3 seconds.For example, if the “H” and “M” buttonsare pressed for more than 3 secondswhile the time is 10:15 p.m., thedisplay will be changed to 22:15.

ONF048106N ONF048101N


67

B450A01NF-GAT

Front Drink Holder

The drink holder for holding cups or cansis located on the main console.

ONF048103

DRINK HOLDER

! CAUTION:o Use the power outlets only when the

engine is running and remove the plugfrom the power outlet after using theelectric device. Using the poweroutlets when the engine stops or keep-ing the electric device plugged in formany hours may cause the battery todischarge.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipmentthat are not designed to operate on 12volts.

o Some electronic devices can causeelectronic interference when pluggedinto the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices in your vehicle.

POWER OUTLETS

B500D02NF-AAT

(If Installed)

These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment onlywhen the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"position.

ONF048105


68 SEATBACK POCKET

B540B01E-GAT

(If Installed)

HNF2042

The seatback pockets for holding papersare located on the backside of the frontseats.

! CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closedposition while not in use.

HNF2185

B450B01NF-GAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holder for holding cups orcans is located in the center of the rear seatarmrest.

! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passen-gers. Spilled liquids can damageinterior trim and electrical compo-nents.

o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. Theseobjects can be thrown out in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident,possibly injuring the passengers inthe vehicle.


69

!

SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)Sun Shade

B460A01NF

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or toblock sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.This could result in loss of control and anaccident that may cause death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

B460B01TG-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.

B460B01NF

Auto slide open

To use the auto slide feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console.The sunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point, pressany sunroof control button.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

Auto slide close

To close the sunroof, press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console for morethan 1 second.The sunroof will slide all the way close. Tostop at the desired point, press any sunroofcontrol button.


70

!

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's

hands, arms or body are between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash, asthis could result in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out ofthe sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other partsof the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise, youcould be seriously injured if the ve-hicle stops suddenly or if the vehicleis involved in an accident.

!

B460C01TG-GAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Auto tilt up

To use the auto tilt feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console. Thesunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

Auto Reverse

If an object or part of the body is detectedwhile the sunroof is closing automatically,it will reverse direction, and then stop.Auto reverse function does not work if a tinyobstacle is blocked between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroof beforeclosing it.

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingsunroof.

Manual slide close

Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

B460B01NF


71

B460D01NF-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not operate electrically:

1. Open the sunglass holder.2. Remove the two mounting screws of the

front overhead console with a (+) driver.

HNF2028

! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely

cold temperatures or when it iscovered with ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof controlbutton longer than necessary.Damage to the motor or system com-ponents could occur.

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrenchprovided with the vehicle into the socket.This wrench can be found in the vehicle'strunk or glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open orcounterclockwise to close the sunroof.

HNF2029


72

B490A02NF-AAT

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has two buttons.The two buttons are:

o DOOR

In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened or when a door is unlocked by thetransmitter. The light goes out gradually 30seconds after the door is closed. Howeverif the ignition switch is ON or all vehicledoors are locked when the door is closed,interior light will turn off even within 30seconds.

HNF2110

! CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may notoperate properly.

B460E01TG-GAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use theemergency handle to operate the sunroof,you have to reset your sunroof system asfollows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.2. Press the TILT UP button for more than

1 second to tilt up the sunroof completelywhen the sunroof is fully closed. Then,release the button.

3. Press and hold the TILT UP button onceagain until the sunroof has returned tothe original position of TILT UP after it israised a little higher than the maximumTILT UP position. Then, release thebutton.

4. Press and hold the TILT UP button within5 seconds until the sunroof is operatedas follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDECLOSE

Then, release the button.

B480B01Y-AAT

Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the lighton or off. This light produces a spot beamfor convenient use as a map light at nightor as a personal light for the driver and thepassenger.

B480B01NF

INTERIOR LIGHT

Without sunroof

With sunroof


73

CAUTION:Do not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the ve-hicle is not running.

!

SUNGLASS HOLDER

!

B491A03O-AAT

The sunglass holder is located on the frontoverhead console. Push the end of thecover to open the sunglass holder.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holder inthe event of a sudden stop or an acci-dent, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blockedby an open sunglass holder.

HNF2183

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

!

STORAGE BOX

B500A01Y-AAT

GLOVE BOX

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, theglove box door should be kept closedwhen the car is in motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glovebox release lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

ONF048099


74

The center console box is used for storingcassette tapes or small articles.To use the center console box, pull up thehandle and lift the lid as shown.

CENTER CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

B505A01NF-GAT

Center Console Box

ONF048098

B500B01HP-DAT

MULTI BOX

To open the cover, push the cover. It can beused for storing small items.

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box(If Installed)

Opening the glove box will automaticallyturn on the light when the multi-functionswitch is turned to the first position.

ONF048100N


75

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, thecenter console box lid should be keptclosed when the car is in motion.

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type

The outside rearview mirrors can beadjusted to your preferred rear vision, bothdirectly behind the vehicle, and to the rearof the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for bothright and left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of eithermirror:

1. Move the selecting switch (1) to the rightor left to activate the adjustablemechanism for the corresponding doormirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate perimeter switch asillustrated.

ONF048035L

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-

ously for an unnecessary length oftime.

o Scraping ice from the mirror facecould cause permanent damage. Toremove any ice, use a sponge, softcloth or approved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface, and anyobjects seen in this mirror are closerthan they appear.


76

The outside rearview mirror heater is actu-ated in connection with the rear window de-froster. To heat the outside rearview mirrorglass, push in the switch for the rear windowdefroster. The rearview mirror glass will beheated for defrosting or defogging and willgive you improved rear vision in inclementweather conditions. Push the switch again toturn the heater off. The outside rearview mirrorheater automatically turns itself off after 20minutes.

B510D01HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORHEATER

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEWMIRROR

B520A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/nightinside rearview mirror. The "night" positionis selected by flipping the tab at the bottomof the mirror toward you. In the "night"position, the glare of headlights of carsbehind you is reduced.

B520A01NF

ONF048071N

ONF048072

With Manual A/C

With Automatic A/C


77HOMELINK MIRROR

B520C01NF-AAT

Automatic-Dimming Mirrorwith Z-Nav™ Electronic CompassDisplay and HomeLink® (If Installed)

Your vehicle comes with a Gentex Auto-matic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Elec-tronic Compass Display and an IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System.During nighttime driving, this feature willautomatically detect and reduce rearviewmirror glare while the compass indicatesthe direction the vehicle is pointed. TheHomeLink® Universal Transceiver allowsyou to activate your garage door(s), electricgate, home lighting, etc.

1. Channel 1 Button2. Channel 2 Button3. Status Indicator LED4. Channel 3 Button

5. Rear Light Sensor6. Dimming On/Off Button7. Compass Control Button8. Display

B520C01NF


78

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) Mirror

The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is the mostadvanced way to reduce annoying glare inthe rearview mirror during any drivingsituation. For more information regardingNVS® mirrors and other applications,please refer to the Gentex website:www.gentex.com.

CAUTION:The NVS® Mirror automatically reducesglare during driving conditions basedupon light levels monitored in front of thevehicle and from the rear of the vehicle.These light sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object that wouldobstruct either light sensor will degradethe automatic dimming control feature.

!

Automatic-Dimming Function

Your mirror will automatically dim upondetecting glare from the vehicles travelingbehind you. The auto-dimming functioncan be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFFButton:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which isindicated by the green Status IndicatorLED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns theauto-dimming function ON which isindicated by the green Status IndicatorLED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

Compass Function

The Compass can be turned ON and OFFand will remember the last state when theignition is cycled. To turn the displayfeature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to turn

the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button again

to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with pressand hold sequences of the button andare detailed below.

There is a difference between magneticnorth and true north. The compass in themirror can compensate for this differencewhen it knows the Magnetic Zone in whichit is operating. This is set either by the dealeror by the user. The operating Zone Numbersfor North America are shown in the figure onthe following section.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is alsoequipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass thatshows the vehicle Compass heading inthe Display Window using the 8 basiccardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).


79

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location on theZone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for morethan 3 but less than 6 seconds, thecurrent Zone Number will appear on thedisplay.

3. Pressing and holding the button againwill cause the numbers to increment (Note:they will repeat …13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …).Releasing the button when the desiredZone Number appears on the display willset the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compass willstart displaying a compass heading again.

There are some conditions that can causechanges to the vehicle magnets. Items suchas installing a ski rack or a CB antenna oreven some body repair work on the vehiclecan cause changes to the vehicle's magneticfield. In these situations, the compass willneed to be re-calibrated to quickly correct forthese changes. To re-calibrate the compass:1. Press and hold the button for more

than 6 seconds. When the compassmemory is cleared a "C" will appear in thedisplay.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive the vehiclein 2 complete circles at less than 5 MPH(8 Km/h).

B520C05NF


80

!Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System

The HomeLink® Wireless Control Systemprovides a convenient way to replace up tothree hand-held radio-frequency (RF)transmitters with a single built-in device.This innovative feature will learn the radiofrequency codes of most currenttransmitters to operate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entrydoor locks, security systems, even homelighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmedby following the outlined procedures.Additional HomeLink® information can befound at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION:Before programming HomeLink® to agarage door opener or gate operator,make sure that people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Do not useHomeLink® with any garage door openerthat lacks the safety stop and reversefeatures as required by U.S. federalsafety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling thedoor to stop and reverse - does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of seriousinjury or death.

Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:o When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehicleoutside of the garage.

o It is recommended that a new batterybe placed in the hand-held transmitterof the device being programmed toHomeLink® for quicker training andaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

o Some vehicles may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the second (or"accessories") position for program-ming and/or operation of HomeLink.

o In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questionsafter following the programming stepslisted below, contact HomeLink® at:www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.Retain the original transmitter of the RF

device you are programming for use inother vehicles as well as for futureHomeLink® programming. It is alsosuggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons beerased for security purposes.


81

Standard Programming

To train most devices, follow theseinstructions:1. For first-time programming, press and

hold the two outside buttons, HomeLink®

Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons, untilthe indicator light begins to flash (after20 seconds). Release both buttons. Donot hold the buttons for longer than 30seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from theHomeLink® buttons while keeping theindicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold boththe HomeLink® and hand-heldtransmitter button. DO NOT release thebuttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttons thered Indicator Status LED will flash slowlyand then rapidly after HomeLink®

successfully trains to the frequencysignal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button ispressed and released.

6. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2through 5.

Rolling Code Programming

Rolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996may be determined by the following:o Reference the device owner's manual

for verification.o The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver but does not activate thedevice.

o Press and hold the trained HomeLinkbutton. The device has the rolling codefeature if the indicator light flashes rapidlyand then turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow theseinstructions:1. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe "learn" or "smart" button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color ofthe button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficultylocating the training button, referencethe device owner's manual or pleasevisit our Web site at www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or"smart" button (which activates the"training light").

NOTE:There are 30 seconds in which to initiatestep3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and then releasethe desired HomeLink® button. Repeatthe "press/hold/release" sequence asecond time to complete theprogramming. (Some devices mayrequire you to repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate.

5. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow either steps1 through 4 above for other RollingCode devices or steps 2 through 5 inStandard Programming for standarddevices.

Gate Operator & Canadian Programming

During programming, your handheld trans-mitter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press the IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System button(note steps 2 through 4 in the StandardProgramming portion of this document)while you press and re-press ("cycle") your


82

!handheld transmitter every two secondsuntil the frequency signal has been learned.The indicator light will flash slowly andthen rapidly after several seconds uponsuccessful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink® button. Activationwill now occur for the trained device (i.e.garage door opener, gate operator, securitysystem, entry door lock, home/officelighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also beused at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® But-ton

To program a new device to a previouslytrained HomeLink® button, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. Do NOT release until step 4 hasbeen completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehandheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches awayfrom the HomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmitterbutton. The HomeLink® indicator lightwill flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flashrapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your new device shouldactivate.

Erasing HomeLink® Buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.However, to erase all three programmedbuttons:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System is now in the training (learn)mode and can be programmed at any timefollowing the appropriate steps in theProgramming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

This device complies with Part 15 FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

WARNING:The transceiver has been tested andcomplies with FCC and Industry Canadarules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate thedevice.

NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the GentexCorporation, Zeeland, Michigan.HomeLink® is a registered trademarkowned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated,Milwaukee, Wisconsin.


83

!

PARKING BRAKE

B530A03A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake beforeleaving the vehicle. This also turns on theparking brake indicator light when the keyis in the "ON" or "START" position. Beforedriving away, be sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the indicatorlight is off.

WARNING:Whenever leaving vehicle or parkingalways set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Vehiclesnot fully engaged in park with the parkingbrake set are at risk for movinginadvertently and injuring yourself orothers.

o To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull up the parkingbrake lever slightly. Secondly, depressthe release button and lower the parkingbrake lever while holding the button.

CAUTION:Driving with the parking brake appliedwill cause excessive brake pad (or lining)and brake rotor wear.

!

ONF058010

ONF058009

o To engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then without pressingthe release button in, pull the parkingbrake lever up as far as possible. Inaddition it is recommended that whenparking the vehicle on a gradient, theshift lever should be positioned in theappropriate low gear on manual trans-mission vehicles or in the Park positionon automatic transaxle vehicles.


84

ONF048132

B540B03E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release leverlocated inside the trunk. It will glow after thetrunk is closed. When pulled, this lever willrelease the trunk latch mechanism andopen the trunk.

! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is inmotion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonousexhaust gases may enter the car andserious illness or death may result. Seeadditional warnings concerning exhaustgases on page 2-2.

TRUNK LID

B540A01S-AAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid, pull up the lid releaselever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure the trunklid is securely fastened, always check bytrying to pull it up again.

ONF048010L


85

! WARNING:o If a person becomes locked in the

trunk, pull the emergency trunkrelease lever of the inside panel in thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o Keep cars locked and keys out of thereach of children. HYUNDAI recom-mends parents teach children aboutthe emergency trunk release lever intheir vehicle and how to open the trunklid if they are accidentally locked inthe trunk.

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOPLIGHT

B550A02Y-AAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the highmounted rear stop light in the center of therear window also lights when the brakesare applied.

B550A01NF-A

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RE-LEASE

B560A04Y-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened frominside the vehicle by pushing the fuel-fillerlid opener switch located on the driver'sdoor.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauseice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice andrelease the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not useradiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicleto a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

ONF048018L


86

! WARNING:- When using a portable fuel container,

be sure to place the container on theground while refueling. Static elec-tricity discharge from the containercan ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.While starting refueling, contactshould be maintained until the fillingis complete.

- Do not use cellular phones around agas station. The electric current orelectronic interference from cellularphones can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire.

- When refueling, always turn the en-gine off. Sparks by engine compart-ment electrical equipment can ignitefuel vapors causing a fire. After re-fueling, check to make sure the fuelfiller cap is securely closed, andthen start the engine.

- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotivefuels are flammable.

o After refueling, make sure the fuelcap is installed securely to preventfuel spillage in the event of an accident

o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwisethe " " light will illuminate

o If you open the fuel filler cap duringhigh ambient temperatures, a slight"pressure sound" may be heard. Thisis normal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-matically shuts off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/ex-plosive materials. When refueling,please note the following guidelinescarefully.- Before touching the fuel nozzle or

fuel filler cap, have one's hands incontact with metal parts away fromthe filler neck to discharge staticelectricity.

- Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anythingthat can produce static electricity.Static electricity discharge can ignitefuel vapors resulting in an explosion.

!

! WARNING:o Gasoline vapors are dangerous.

Before refueling, always stop theengine and never smoke or allowsparks and open flames near the fillerarea.

o Never operate your vehicle without afiller cap properly installed, flammablevapors and gasoline could leak out indangerous situations such as acollision or rollover. If the filler capmust be replaced, only use genuineHyundai replacement parts.

HNF2021

WARNING:


87

B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened usingthe remote opener, a manual openerhandle is located inside the trunk on the leftside. Open the fuel filler lid by pulling onthis handle as shown in the illustration.

ONF048021

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01NF-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.

2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift thehood.

ONF048016

HNF2024-E


88

!

SUN VISOR

B580A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passengereither frontal or sideward shade. To reduceglare or to shut out direct rays of the sun,turn the sun visor down.Vanity mirrors are provided on the back ofthe sun visor for the driver and front pas-senger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) label containing useful informationcan be found on the back of each sunvisor.

B580A01NF

WARNING:o Do not place the sun visor in such a

manner that it obscures visibility ofthe roadway, traffic or other objects.

o Do not move the sun visor out to coverthe side window if there is an itemattended to it such as a garage doorremote control, pens, air freshenersor the like. These objects could causeinjury if the curtain airbag is deployed.

!

3. Raise the hood by hand.

When closing the hood, slowly close thehood and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that

the hood is firmly latched beforedriving away. If it is not latched, thehood could fly open while the vehicleis being driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in an ac-cident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision isobstructed and the hood could fall orbe damaged.


89

B600B01NF-GAT

Tilt and telescopic type(If Installed)

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever downward fully to unlock.2. Adjust upward or downward and

forward or backward to set the steeringwheel to the desired position.

3. After adjustment, securely tighten thelever by pulling it upward.

ONF048031

STEERING WHEEL

B600A01NF-GAT

Tilt type

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it tounlock.

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to thedesired position.

3. After adjustment, release the lever.

ONF048114

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

HNF2172


90 FRONT DOOR WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is toassist when you get in or out and also towarn passing vehicles.

ONF078040

!

CAUTION:After adjusting the steering wheel, trymoving it up and down to make sure it islocked in position.

!

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury or death.

HORN

B610A01L-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

ONF048032


91

B660B02NF-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Pull the cruise control ON/OFF switch.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the in-strument cluster will illuminate. Thisturns the system on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speedabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

ONF058020

REAR SEAT ARMREST

B611A01Y-AAT

This armrest is located in the center of therear seatback.

B611A01NF-A

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A02S-AAT

The cruise control system provides auto-matic speed control for your comfort whendriving on straight, open freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested highways.This system is designed to function aboveapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTE:Cruise control is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or other bad weatherconditions.


92

B660C01NF-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system,push the control switch "CANCEL".Additionally, the following actions willdisengage the system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual

transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "N" position

(Automatic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than 25 mph (40 km/h).o Release the cruise control ON/OFF

switch.

ONF058018

ONF058019

3. Push the "SET (−)" switch after you haveset the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed.If the "SET (−)" switch is selected, thecruise "SET" indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal and the desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

5. To increase speed, temporarily depressthe accelerator pedal enough for thevehicle to exceed the preset speed.When you remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will returnto the speed you have set.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases morethan 9 mph (15 km/h) below the set speedor decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h),the cruise control system will automati-cally cancel the set speed.


93

B660D01NF-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume thespeed set prior to cancellation when youpush the control switch "RESUME (+)" andrelease it to return (when travelling above25 mph).If the control switch "RESUME(+)" isselected, the cruise "SET" indicator in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

ONF058017

B660F01NF-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch "SET (−)" andhold it. While the control switch ispushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.If the "SET(−)" switch is selected, thecruise "SET" indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained,release the control switch.

ONF058019

B660E01NF-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RESUME (+)"and hold it.If the control switch "RESUME(+)" isselected, the cruise "SET" indicator inthe instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and releasethe control switch. While the controlswitch is held, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.


94

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) Switch

o If the button is pressed for 0.8 second ormore, it will work as follows in eachmode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CDP modeIt will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC modeIt will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

o If the button is pressed for less than 0.8second, it will work as follows in eachmode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the PRESET STATIONselect buttons.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A03NF-AAT

(If Installed)

NOTE:Do not operate audio remote controlswitches simultaneously.

MODE Switch

Press the MODE switch to select Radio,CD* (Compact Disc) and CDC* (CompactDisc Changer).Each press of the switch changes the displayas follows:

ONF048108L

! WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise controlto avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

o Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, drivingin heavy or varying traffic, or onslippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered)or winding roads or over 6% up-hill ordown-hill roads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-speed driving of amanual transaxle vehicle, do not shiftinto neutral without depressing theclutch pedal, since the engine will beoverrevved. If this happens, depressthe clutch pedal or release the cruisecontrol ON/OFF switch.

o During normal cruise controloperation, when the "SET" switch isactivated or reactivated after apply-ing the brakes, the cruise control willenergize after approximately 3seconds. This delay is normal.

* : if installed

RADIO (FM1 → FM2 → AM) → CD* → CDC*

→


95

CDP modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

MUTE Switch

o Pull the MUTE switch to slience thesound.

o Once again press the MUTE switch torestore the sound.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to deceasevolume.


96 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01E-GAT

ONF048075

B710B01NF-GAT

Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in themiddle of the dashboard.The side ventilators are located on eachside of the dashboard.To change the direction of the air flow, turnthe control knob under the vents.To control the amount of air, turn the controlknob on the left side of the vents. The ventsare opened when the vent knob is movedto " " position. The vents are closed whenthe vent knob is moved to " ". Keep thesevents clear of any obstructions.

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator5. Rear Floor Vents


9797

B670B02O-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01NF-GAT

Rotary and Push Button Type

1. Temperature control2. Fan speed control3. Mode selection knob4. Air conditioning switch5. Air intake control6. Rear window defroster switch

This is used to select the blower fan speed.The blower fan speed, and the volume ofair delivered from the system, may becontrolled manually by setting the blowercontrol between the "1" and "4" position.1 is the lowest fan speed and 4 is thehighest fan speed. Setting the fan speedcontrol knob to the "0" position turns off thefan.

ONF048073

ONF048079

B670E01A-AAT

Temperature Control

This is used to turn the heating system onand off and to select the degree of heatingdesired.

ONF048077

Cool Warm


98

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) *1

Air is discharged through the face levelvents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/Cwill turn on automatically and"Recirculation" mode will be activated.

*1 : See page 1-96

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D) *1

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

Floor-Defrost Level (A, C, E, D) *1

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, sidedefroster nozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,"Fresh" mode will be activated.

Defrost-Level (A, D) *1

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle andside ventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated to improvewindshield defrosting.

B670D04O-AAT

Air Flow Control

The mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through theventilation system. Air can be directed tothe floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield.Five symbols are used to represent Face,Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrostair position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool theinside of the vehicle faster.

Face-Level (B, D) *1

Air is discharged through the face levelvents.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E) *1

Air is discharged through the face ventsand the floor vents. This makes it possibleto have cooler air from the dashboardvents and warmer air from the floor outletsat the same time.

ONF048074


9999

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will

change to " " mode when the ignitionswitch is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode selected.

o When you change to another modefrom MAX A/C, the A/C and the airintake control switch are set as shownin the following chart.

* The A/C or the air intake control switchreturns to its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

B670C03Y-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air enters thevehicle from outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the other functions selected.With the " " mode selected, air from withinthe passenger compartment is drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the other functionsselected.

ONF048078

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the windshieldand side windows and the air within thepassenger compartment will becomestale. In addition prolonged use of the airconditioning with the " " modeselected may result in the air within thepassenger compartment becoming ex-cessively dry.


100VENTILATION

B700A02A-AAT

BI-LEVEL HEATING

B710A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-levelheating controls. This makes it possible tohave cooler air from the dashboard ventsand warmer air from the floor outlets at thesame time. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control switch to thefresh air ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air( ) position.

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to the face( ) position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

For normal heating operation, set the airflow control to the floor ( ) position. (The"Fresh" mode will be activated.)

For faster heating, the air intake controlswitch should be set in the recirculate ( )position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flowcontrol to the defrost ( ) position (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperaturecontrol to "Warm".

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A01O-AAT


101101

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilationsystem, temporarily set the air intakecontrol at the position. Be sure toreturn the control to the positionwhen the irritation has passed to keepfresh air in the vehicle. This will helpkeep the driver alert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should be takenthat these are not blocked by leaves,snow, ice or other obstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air ( ) position and fan speed tothe desired position, turn on the airconditioning system, and adjusttemperature control to desired tempera-ture.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/airconditioning control panel.

ONF048080

B740B03O-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCoolingTo use the air conditioning to cool theinterior:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( )position.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch bypushing in on the switch. The airconditioning indicator light should comeon at the same time.


o Set the temperature control to "Cool".("Cool" provides maximum cooling. Thetemperature may be moderated bymoving the control toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed. For greater cooling, turn the fancontrol to one of the higher speeds ortemporarily select the recirculate ( )position on the air intake control.


102

B740C02O-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( )position.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch. Theair conditioning indicator light shouldcome on at the same time.


o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed.

o For more rapid action, set the fan at oneof the higher speeds.

o Adjust the temperature control to providethe desired amount of warmth.

B740D02Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when youfirst get in, open the windows for a fewminutes to expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed tokeep hot air out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic,shift to a lower gear. This increasesengine speed, which in turn increasesthe speed of the air conditioningcompressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air condition-ing off to avoid the possibility of theengine overheating.

o During winter months or in periods whenthe air conditioning is not used regularly,run the air conditioning once everymonth for a few minutes. This will helpcirculate the lubricants and keep yoursystem in peak operating condition.


103103

ONF048093 ONF048095N

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02E-AAT

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on the exteriorwindshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.

ONF048092

Manual A/C Automatic A/C Manual A/C Automatic A/C

ONF048094N


104 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-matic heating and cooling control systemcontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.

B970B01NF-AAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Fan speed control button2. Air conditioning button3. Air intake control button4. Front windshield defrost button5. AUTO (automatic control) button6. OFF button

7. Passenger's temperature control button8. Rear window defrost button9. Mode selection button10. A/C display11. Dual temperature control selection

button12. Driver's temperature control button

ONF048082L


105105

B970C01NF-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic TemperatureControl) system automatically controlsheating and cooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicatorlight will illuminate confirming that theFace, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes aswell as the blower speed and airconditioner will be controlledautomatically.And, the air conditioning will operate ifambient temperature is higher than35°F(1.5°C) and automatically turns offif the ambient temperature drops below33°F(0.6°C).

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the de-sired temperature.The temperature will increase to themaximum "HI" by pushing the up button.The temperature will decrease to theminimum "LO" by pushing the downbutton.

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature mode willreset to Centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from Cen-tigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;Press the "OFF" and "AUTO " buttonsimultaneously for 3 seconds.The display shows that the unit of tem-perature is adjusted to Centigrade orFahrenheit (°C →→→→→ °F or °F →→→→→ °C).

ONF048083N

ONF048086


106

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the "AUTO" button. Inthis state, the system sequentially worksaccording to the order of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are notselected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convertto automatic control of the system.

ONF048115

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensorwhich is located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heatingand cooling system.

ONF048087

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Pressing the righttemperature control button willautomatically switch to the DUAL modeas well.

2. Press the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature. Pressthe right temperature control to adjustthe passenger side temperature.

When the driver side temperature is set tothe highest (HI) or lowest (LO) temperaturesetting, the DUAL mode is deactivated formaximum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally1. Press the DUAL button again to

deactivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to the sameas the driver side temperature.

2. Press the left temperature control button.The driver and passenger sidetemperature will be adjusted equally.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode displaywill reset to Fahrenheit.This is normal condition. You can switchthe temperature mode between Fahrenheitto Centigrade as follows;While depressing the AUTO button,depress the OFF button for 3 seconds ormore. The display will change fromFahrenheit to Centigrade, or fromCentigrade to Fahrenheit.


107107

B980B01NF-GAT

Fan Speed Control

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, themore air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF"button turns off the fan.

ONF048089N

B670C03Y-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.To change the air intake control mode(Fresh mode, Recirculation mode), pushthe control button.

ONF048088

FRESH MODEThe indicator light on the buttongoes on when the air intakecontrol is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODEThe indicator light on the buttonis illuminated when the air intakecontrol is in recirculation mode.With the "Fresh" mode selected,air enters the vehicle from theoutside and is heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected,air from within the passenger compart-ment will be drawn through the heatingsystem and heated or cooled according tothe function selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolonged useof the air conditioning with the "Recircu-lation" mode selected may result in theair within the passenger compartmentbecoming excessively dry.


108

Face-Level (B, D) *1

When selecting the "Face-Level" mode,the indicator light will come on, causing airto be discharged through the face levelvents.

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operationof the heating and cooling system.

ONF048091

B980E01NF-GAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air canbe directed to the floor, dashboard outlets,or windshield. Four symbols are used torepresent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost position.

ONF048084N

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D) *1

When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indi-cator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents,windsheld defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E) *1

When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indica-tor light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to havecooler air from the dashboard vents andwarmer air from the floor outlets at thesame time.


109109

Floor-Defrost Level (A, C, E, D) *1

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode,the indicator light will come on and the airwill be discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, sidedefroster nozzle and side ventilator.If any of the temperature control switch, theblower fan control switch, or the defrostswitch is selected in "Floor-Defrost" mode,the A/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated.

*1 : See page 1-96

B980F01NF-AAT

Defrost Switch

ONF048071N

ONF048072

Type A

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, thefresh mode will be automatically selectedand the air will be discharged through thewindshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator. To assist indefrosting, the air conditioning will oper-ate if ambient temperature is higher than35°F(1.5°C) and automatically turns off ifthe ambient temperature drops below33°F(0.6°C).

Type B

B760A01NF-AAT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWERUNIT) (If Installed)

The climate control air filter is located in theright side of the instrument panel.It operates to decrease the amount of pol-lutants entering the car.To replace the climate control air filter,refer to page 6-19.

HNF2181

Inside ofa vehicle

Evaporator coreFilterBlower

Outside air

Inside air


110 ANTENNA

B870D01Y-AAT

Glass Antenna

When the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the "ON"or "ACC" position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals throughthe antenna in the rear window glass.

HNF2189-A

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper toremove foreign deposits from theinner surface of the glass as this maycause damage to the antennaelements.

o Avoid adding metallic coatings to therear window glass, such as Ni, Cd, etc.These can disturb receiving AM andFM broadcast signals.

! CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severeconditions such as dusty, rough roads,more frequent climate control air filterinspections and changes are re-quired.

o When the air flow rate is suddenlydecreased, the system should bechecked at an authorized dealer.

!


111111

The satellite antenna is installed on theroof of your car to listen to a satellite radiobroadcast. This antenna is permanentlyattached and can not be removed

NOTE:In places such as tunnels, the satellitebroadcast signal is not available.

D281400AFD

Aux, USB and i-Pod (if installed)NOTE:When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.

Type A

Type BONF048111

ONF048112

B875D01TG-AAT

AVN (AUDIO, VIDEO AND NAVIGA-TION) System (If Installed)If your vehicle has an AVN, you can referto the AVN operation manual providedwith AVN for the detailed function.

! CAUTION:This vehicle may include mercury-con-taining devices installed by the manu-facturer:

* High Intensity Discharge Headlamps * Navigation Display * Back-lit Instruments

Remove Devices Before Vehicle dis-posal Upon Removal of Devices:Please Reuse, Recycle, or Dispose asHazardous Waste

ONF048133N

B880A01NF-AAT

Satellite Antenna


112 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This isbecause AM radio waves are transmittedat low frequencies. These long, lowfrequency radio waves can follow thecurvature of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addition,they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by the radioantenna on your car. This signal is thenreceived by the radio and sent to your carspeakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the bestpossible quality reproduction. However,in some cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the distancefrom the radio station, closeness of otherstrong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high fre-quencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-casts generally begin to fade at shortdistances from the station. Also, FM signalsare easily affected by buildings, mountains,or other obstructions. These can result incertain listening conditions which mightlead you to believe a problem exists withyour radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed area Iron bridges


113113

!o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, we suggest that you selectanother stronger station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitterand your radio can disturb the signalcausing static or fluttering noises tooccur. Reducing the treble level maylessen this effect until the disturbanceclears.

o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may beginto play. This is because your radio isdesigned to lock onto the clearest signal.If this occurs, select another station witha stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflectedsignal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, select anotherstation until the condition has passed.

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradio

When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellularphone at a place as far as possible from theaudio equipment.

WARNING:Hyundai recommends that you neveruse a cell phone while driving. This couldresult in loss of control, and an accidentthat may cause death, serious injury, orproperty damage. You must stop at asafe place to use a cellular phone.

NOTE:Some states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of thespecific requirements in your area.

B750A04L B750A05L


114 CARE OF DISCS

B850A02L

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled into theunit by the self loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will not leavefingerprints on the surface. If the surface isscratched, it may cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, orgummed labels on the disc. Do not write onthe disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warpedor cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skip signaltracks. Wipe the surface clean with a cleansoft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled,dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution ofmild neutral detergent to wipe it clean. Seedrawing.

B850A01L


115AUDIO SYSTEM

PA710SA01NF-AAT

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDP_RADIO

1. FM Selection Button2. AM Selection Button3. XM Selection Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. Information Display Button10. SET UP Button11. TUNE/ENTER Button12. CAT(FLDR) Button13. Pre-set Button

12

34

5

6

78

109

12

11

13


116

PA710SB01NF-AAT

1. FM Selection Button

Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed each time.

2. AM Selection Button

Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.

3. XM Selection Button

Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the orderof XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟···➟XM1··· when thebutton is pressed each time.

4. CD/AUX Selection Button

If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns toCD mode, and if a device is connected toAUX then it toggles.CD➟AUX➟CD··· when the button ispressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX ifthe auxiliary device is not connected)

5. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 200khzto automatically select channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channelis found.

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.

6. Power ON/OFF & Volume ControlButton

Turns the set on/off when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN Button

If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill increase and receive the correspond-ing broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) eachand find other broadcasts as the frequencyincreases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

8. MUTE Button

Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.

9. Information Display Button

Information Display function operation (In-formation is displayed each time (the) Keyis pressed) : Pressing the Category/Channel➟ Artist Name/SongTitle➟Category/Channel... for 3 secondswill display the corresponding text thenbecome restored.

Text Scroll operationAfter pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the Tune Knob will operatethe Page up function displaying 16(Max.characters) characters for 3 seconds eachdispalys.

10. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the XM option,TEXT SCROLL, AVC and adjustmentmode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right andPUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The set up item changes from TEXTSCROLL ➟AVC➟XM...


117

11. TUNE/ENTER Button

Turn this button clockwise by one notch toincrease frequency by 200Khz from cur-rent frequency.Turn this button counterclockwise by onenotch to decrease frequency by 200Khzfrom current frequency.

Press this button while holding SET UPbutton to activate / inactivate the item.Select SET UP item using left and rightfunction of the Tune button.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCETUNE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-dio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

o BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o MIDDLE ControlTo increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

o BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counter clockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

12. CAT(FLDR) Button

Moves [CAT ] button when Category Upsearch operation.o Category is moved Up from the cat-

egory currently being received andCategory Name becomes displayed.

o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5seconds, then the previous mode willbe restored.

o If the Key is pressed while in the lastCategory, then the first category willbecome displayed and operation willbe repeated.

o Corresponding category can be se-lected by pressing ENTER.

Moves [CAT ] button when CategoryDown search operation.o Category is moved Down from the cat-



o If the [CAT ] Key is pressed while inthe first Category, then the last categorywill become displayed and operationwill be repeated.


13. Pre-set Button

Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 secondsto play the channel saved in each button.Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to save current channel to the re-spective button with a beep.


118

PA710SC01NF-AAT

CD (PA710S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDP_CD

1. CD loading slot2. CD indicator3. CD Eject Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Track Selection Button6. INFO Button7. TUNE/ENTER Button8. REPEAT Button9. RANDOM Play Button10. SCAN Play Button11. MUTE Button

3

1

4

5

9

11

6

7

8

2

10


119

PA710SD01NF-AAT

1. CD loading slot

Please face printed side upward and gen-tly push in. When the ignition switch is onACC or ON and power is off, power isautomatically turned on if the CD is loaded.This CDP supports 12 cm CD. But if VCD,Data CD are loaded, "Reading error" mes-sage will appear and CD will be ejected.

2. CD Indicator

When car ignition switch is ACC or ON andif the CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted.If the CD is ejected the light is turned off.

3. CD eject Button

Push button to eject the CD during CDplayback. This button is enabled whenignition switch is off.


If the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.If no Disc and auxiliary device is con-nected, it displays "NO Media" for 5 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.

5. Automatic Track Selection Button

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds to play from the beginning ofcurrent song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds and press again within 1 sec-onds to play the previous song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate reverse direction high speedsound search of current song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds to play the next song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate high speed sound search ofcurrent song.

6. INFO Button

Displays the information of the current CDTRACK in the order of DISC TITLE➟ DISCARTIST➟TRACK TITLE➟ TRACKARTIST➟ TOTAL TRACK➟ Play Screen➟DISC TITLE ➟···.(not displayed if the infor-mation is not available on the DISC.)


Turn this button clockwise to display songsafter current song.Also, turn this button counterclockwise todisplay songs before current song.To listen to the displayed song, press thebutton to skip to the song and play.






120

!CAUTION IN USINGUSB DEVICE:

o To use the external USB device, makesure the device is not connected whenstarting up the vehicle and connectthe device after starting up.

o If you start the vehicle when the USBdevice is connected, it may damagethe USB device. (USB is not ESA)

o If the vehicle is started up or turned offwhile the external USB device is con-nected, the external USB device maynot work.



8.REPEAT Button

Repeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 seconds.Repeats the entire DISC when the buttonis pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.

9. RANDOM Play Button

Turns on/off the randomization of the playlist of files in the currently played DISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

10. SCAN Play Button

Plays first 10 seconds of each song in theDISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

11. MUTE Button

Press this button to temporarily cut offthe Sound. "Audio Mute" is displayed onthe LCD. Press the button once again tocancel MUTE mode.

o It may not play all MP3 or WMA files.1) It can only play MP3 files with the

compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music fileswith the compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

o Take cautions for static electricitywhen connecting or disconnecting theexternal USB device.

o Encoded MP3 PLAYER'S are not rec-ognizable.

o Depending on the condition of the ex-ternal USB device, the connectedexternal USB device can be unrecog-nizable.

o When the formatted byte/sector set-ting of External USB devices is noteither 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, thenthe device will not be recognized.

o Only the USB device formatted to FAT12/16/32 can be used.

o USB device without USB IF(Implementers-Forum) authentica-tion may not be recognizable.

o Make sure the USB connection termi-nal does not come in contact with ahuman body or any other object.


121

o If you repeat connecting or discon-necting USB device in a short periodof time, it may damage the device.

o You might hear unusual noise whenconnecting or disconnecting a USBdevice.

o If you disconnect the external USBdevice during playback in USB mode,the external USB device can be dam-aged. Therefore, connect the externalUSB device when the engine is turnedoff or in another mode.

o Depending on the type and capacity ofthe external USB device or the type ofthe files stored in the device, there isa difference in the time taken for rec-ognition of the device, but this doesnot indicate a problem.

o Do not use the USB device for otherpurposes than playing music files.

o Use of USB accessories such as arecharger or heater using the USB I/Fmay lower the performance or causetrouble.

o If you use devices such as a USB hubyou purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may not rec-ognize the USB device. Connect theUSB device directly to the multimediaterminal of the vehicle.


122

PA710SE01NF-AAT

USING USB (PA710S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDP_USB

1. AUX Selection Button2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8. SCAN Selection Button

1

2

6

3

5

7

8

4


123

PA710SF01NF-AAT

If a USB device is connected to the multipleterminal inside the console on the righthand side of the driver’s seat, the ‘USB’icon will be displayed on the top rightcorner of the display screen.

1.AUX Selection Button

If USB is connected, it switches to the USBmode from the CD mode to play the songfiles stored in the USB.If there is no CD and USB mode from theRadio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.

2. Track Moving Button

o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than0.8 seconds to play from the beginningof the song currently played.Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-onds and press it again within 1 secondto move and play the previous track.Press the button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play the song in reverse direc-tion in fast speed.

o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than0.8 seconds to move to the next track.Press the button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play the song in forward direc-tion in fast speed.

3. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER➟TOTALFILE➟normal display➟FILE NAME➟…(Displays no information if the file has nosong information.)

4. Folder moving Button

o Moves [FLDR ] button to the childfolder of the current folder and displaysthe first song in the folder. Press ENT/TUNE button to move to the folder dis-played. It will play the first song in thefolder.

o Moves [FLDR ] button to the parentfolder and displays the first song in thefolder. Press ENT/TUNE button to moveto the folder displayed. It will play thefirst song in the folder.


Turn this button clockwise to display thesongs next to the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently playedsong.Press the button to skip and play the se-lected song.







124


6. RANDOM Playback Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondsto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.

7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondsto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button

Plays 10 seconds of each song in the USBdevice.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.

NOTE FOR USING AN i-Pod DEVICE:o Some i-Pod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (i-Pod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)

o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the i-Pod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audiosystem.

o If the i-Pod crashes due to its owntrouble, reset i-Pod. (Reset: Refer toi-Pod manual)

o An i-Pod may not operate normally onlow battery charge.

! CAUTION IN USING i-PodDEVICE:

o You need the power cable exclusivefor an i-Pod in order to operate i-Podwith the buttons on the audio system.The PC cable provided by Apple maycause a malfunction. Do not use it forvehicle use.

o When connecting the device with an i-Pod cable, push in the jack fully to notinterfere with communication.

o When adjusting the sound of an i-Podand the audio system, the sound ef-fects of both devices will overlap eachand might reduce or distort the qualityof the sound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an i-Pod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an i-Pod.

o When the i-Pod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the i-Poddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect i-Pod cable when you are notusing the i-Pod device.


125

PA710SG01NF-AAT

RUNNING i-Pod (PA710S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDP_IPOD

1. i-Pod Selection Button2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button7. REPEAT Selection Button1

2

6

3

5

7 4


126

PA710SH01NF-AAT

If the i-Pod exclusive cable (if installed) isconnected to the multiple terminal insidethe console on the right hand side of thedriver’s seat, the ‘i-Pod’ icon will be dis-played on the top right corner of the displayscreen.

1. i-Pod Selection Button

If i-Pod is connected, it switches to the i-Pod mode from the CD mode to play thesong files stored in the i-Pod.If there is no CD and AUX mode from theRadio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.




3. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟normal dis-play ➟FILE NAME➟….(Displays no information if the file has nosong information.)

4. Category Selection Button

Moves to the upper category from currentlyplayed category of the i-Pod.To move to (play) the category (song)displayed, press MENU(Preset6).You will be able to search through thelower category of the selected category.The order of i-Pod’s category is SONG,ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and i-Pod.


When you turn the button clockwise, it willdisplay the songs (category) next to thesong currently played (category in the samelevel).Also, when you turn the button counter-clockwise, it will display the songs (cat-egory) before the song currently played(category in the same level).If you want to listen to the song displayedin the song category, press the button, thenit will skip to the selected song and play.







127



Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto activate or deactivate the random play-back of the songs within the current cat-egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 sec-onds to randomly play all songs in theentire album of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel themode.

7. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.


128

PA760SA01NF-AAT

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA760S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDC_RADIO

1. FM Selection Button2. AM Selection Button3. XM Selection Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. Information Display Button10. SET UP Button11. TUNE/ENTER Button12. CAT(FLDR) Button13. Pre-set Button

12

34

5

6

78

109

12

11

13


129

PA760SB01NF-AAT

1. FM Selection Button

Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed each time.

2. AM Selection Button

Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.

3. XM Selection Button

Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the orderof XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟···➟XM1··· when thebutton is pressed each time.


If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns toCD mode, and if a device is connected toAUX then it toggles.CD➟AUX➟CD··· when the button ispressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX ifthe auxiliary device is not connected)

5. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 200khzto automatically select channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channelis found.

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel.

Stops at the previous frequency if no chan-nel is found.

6. Power ON/OFF & Volume ControlButton

Turns the set on/off when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN Button

If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill increase and receive the correspond-ing broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) eachand find other broadcasts as the frequencyincreases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

8. MUTE Button

Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.

9. Information Display Button

Information Display function operation (In-formation is displayed each time (the) Keyis pressed) : Pressing the Category/Channel➟ Artist Name/SongTitle➟Category/Channel... for 3 secondswill display the corresponding text thenbecome restored.

Text Scroll operationAfter pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the Tune Knob will operatethe Page up function displaying 16(Max.characters) characters for 3 seconds eachdispalys.

10. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the XM option,TEXT SCROLL, AVC and adjustmentmode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right andPUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The set up item changes from TEXTSCROLL ➟AVC➟XM....


130


Turn this button clockwise by one notch toincrease frequency by 200Khz from cur-rent frequency.Turn this button counterclockwise by onenotch to decrease frequency by 200Khzfrom current frequency.

Press this button while holding SET UPbutton to activate / inactivate the item toselect.Select SET UP item using left and rightfunction of the Tune button.







12. CAT(FLDR) Button

Moves [CAT ] button when Category Upsearch operation.o Category is moved Up from the cat-



o If the Key is pressed while in the lastCategory, then the first category willbecome displayed and operation willbe repeated.


Moves [CAT ] button when CategoryDown search operation.o Category is moved Down from the cat-



o If the [CAT ] Key is pressed while inthe first Category, then the last categorywill become displayed and operationwill be repeated.


13. Pre-set Button

Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 secondsto play the channel saved in each button.Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to save current channel to the re-spective button with a beep.


131

PA760SC01NF-AAT

CDC (PA760S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDC_CD

1. CD loading slot2. CD indicator3. CD Eject Button4. LOAD Button5. CD/AUX Selection Button6. Automatic Track Selection Button7. INFO Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. REPEAT Button10. RANDOM Play Button11. DISC Selection Button12. SCAN Play Button13. MUTE Button

3

1

5

6

10

7

8

9

4

12

11

2

13


132

PA760SD01NF-AAT

1. CD loading slot

Please face printed side upward and gen-tly push in. When the ignition switch is onACC or ON and power is off, power isautomatically turned on if the CD is loaded.This CDP supports 12 cm CD. But if VCD,Data CD are loaded, "Reading error" mes-sage will appear and CD will be ejected.

2. CD Indicator

When car ignition switch is ACC or ON andif the CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted.If the CD is ejected the light is turned off.

3. CD eject Button

Push button to eject the CD during CDplayback. This button is enabled whenignition switch is off.

4. CD LOAD Button

Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to avail-able CDC deck (from 1~6). Push [LOAD]button for more than 2 seconds to load intoall available decks.The last CD will play. 10 seconds idlestatus will disable loading process.


If the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.If no auxiliary device is connected, it dis-plays "NO MEDIA" for 5 seconds and re-turns to the previous mode.

6. Automatic Track Selection Button

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds to play from the beginning ofcurrent song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds and press again within 1 sec-ond to play the previous song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate reverse direction high speedsound search of current song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8seconds to play the next song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate high speed sound search ofcurrent song.

7. INFO Button

Displays the information of the current CDTRACK in the order of DISC TITLE➟ DISCARTIST➟TRACK TITLE➟ TRACKARTIST➟TOTAL TRACK➟ Play Screen➟DISC TITLE➟···.(not displayed if the infor-mation is not available on the DISC.)


Turn this button clockwise to display songsafter current song.Also, turn this button counterclockwise todisplay songs before current song.To listen to the displayed song, press thebutton to skip to the song and play.




133





9. REPEAT Button

Repeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 seconds.Repeats the entire DISC when the buttonis pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.

10. RANDOM Play Button

Turns on/off the randomization of the playlist of files in the currently played DISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

11. DISC Selection Button

o [DISC ] Change ButtonChanges disc to the previous disc.

o [DISC ] Change ButtonChanges disc to the next disc.

12. SCAN Play Button

Plays first 10 seconds of each song in theDISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

13. MUTE Button

Press this button to temporarily cut off theSound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on theLCD. Press the button once again to can-cel MUTE mode.

!CAUTION IN USINGUSB DEVICE:

o To use the external USB device, makesure the device is not connected whenstarting up the vehicle and connectthe device after starting up.

o If you start the vehicle when the USBdevice is connected, it may damagethe USB device. (USB is not ESA)

o If the vehicle is started up or turned offwhile the external USB device is con-nected, the external USB device maynot work.

o It may not play all MP3 or WMA files.1) It can only play MP3 files with the

compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music fileswith the compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

o Take cautions for static electricitywhen connecting or disconnecting theexternal USB device.

o Encoded MP3 PLAYER'S are not rec-ognizable.

o Depending on the condition of the ex-ternal USB device, the connectedexternal USB device can be unrecog-nizable.


134

o When the formatted byte/sector set-ting of External USB devices is noteither 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, thenthe device will not be recognized.

o Only the USB device formatted to FAT12/16/32 can be used.

o USB device without USB IF(Implementers-Forum) authentica-tion may not be recognizable.

o Make sure the USB connection termi-nal does not come in contact with ahuman body or any other object.

o If you repeat connecting or discon-necting USB device in a short periodof time, it may damage the device.

o You might hear unusual noise whenconnecting or disconnecting a USBdevice.

o If you disconnect the external USBdevice during playback in USB mode,the external USB device can be dam-aged. Therefore, connect the exter-nal USB device when the engine isturned off or in another mode.

o Depending on the type and capacityof the external USB device or the typeof the files stored in the device, thereis a difference in the time taken forrecognition of the device, but this doesnot indicate a problem.

o Do not use the USB device for otherpurposes than playing music files.

o Use of USB accessories such as arecharger or heater using the USB I/F may lower the performance or causetrouble.

o If you use devices such as a USB hubyou purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may not rec-ognize the USB device. Connect theUSB device directly to the multimediaterminal of the vehicle.


135

PA760SE01NF-AAT

USING USB (PA760S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDC_USB

1. AUX Selection Button2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8. SCAN Selection Button

1

2

6

3

5

7

8

4


136

PA760SF01NF-AAT

If a USB is connected to the multiple termi-nal inside the console on the right handside of the driver’s seat, the ‘USB’ icon willbe displayed on the top right corner of thedisplay screen.

1.AUX Selection Button

If a USB device is connected, it switches tothe USB mode from the CD mode to playthe song files stored in the USB device.If there is no CD and USB mode from theRadio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.




3. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER➟TOTALFILE➟normal display➟FILE NAME➟…(Displays no information if the file has nosong information.)

4. Folder moving Button

o Moves [FLDR ] button child folder ofthe current folder and displays the firstsong in the folder. Press ENT/TUNEbutton to move to the folder displayed.It will play the first song in the folder.

o Moves [FLDR ] button parent folderand displays the first song in the folder.Press ENT/TUNE button to move to thefolder displayed. It will play the first songin the folder.


Turn this button clockwise to display thesongs next to the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently playedsong.Press the button to skip and play the se-lected song.







137



Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondsto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.

7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondsto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button

Plays 10 seconds of each song in the USBdevice.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.

NOTE FOR USING i-Pod DEVICE:o Some i-Pod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (i-Pod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)

o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the i-Pod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audiosystem.

o If the i-Pod crashes due to its owntrouble, reset i-Pod. (Reset: Refer toi-Pod manual)

o i-Pod may not operate normally onlow battery.

! CAUTION IN USING i-PodDEVICE:

o You need the power cable exclusivefor an i-Pod in order to operate i-Podwith the buttons on the audio system.The PC cable provided by Apple maycause a malfunction. Do not use it forvehicle use.

o When connecting the device with an i-Pod cable, push in the jack fully to notinterfere with communication.

o When adjusting the sound of an i-Podand the audio system, the sound ef-fects of both devices will overlap eachand might reduce or distort the qualityof the sound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an i-Pod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an i-Pod.

o When the i-Pod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the i-Poddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect i-Pod cable when you are notusing the i-Pod device.


138

PA760SG01NF-AAT

RUNNING i-Pod (PA760S) (If Installed)

NFF_USA_CDC_IPOD

1. i-Pod Selection Button2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button7. REPEAT Selection Button1

2

6

3

5

7 4


139

PA760SH01NF-AAT

In case the i-Pod exclusive cable (if in-stalled) is connected to the multiple termi-nal inside the consol on the right hand sideof the driver’s seat. When the i-Pod isconnected, the ‘i-Pod’ icon will be dis-played on the top right corner of the displayscreen.

1. i-Pod Selection Button

If i-Pod is connected, it switches to the i-Pod mode from the CD mode to play thesong files stored in the i-Pod.If there are no CD and AUX mode from theRadio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.




3. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟normal dis-play ➟FILE NAME➟….(Displays no information if the file has nosong information.)

4. Category Selection Button

Moves to the upper category from currentlyplayed category of the i-Pod.To move to (play) the category (song)displayed, press MENU(preset6)You will be able to search through thelower category of the selected category.The order of i-Pod’s category is SONG,ALBUMES, ARTISTS, GENRES, and i-Pod.


When you turn the button clockwise, it willdisplay the songs (category) next to thesong currently played (category in the samelevel).Also, when you turn the button counter-clockwise, it will display the songs (cat-egory) before the song currently played(category in the same level).If you want to listen to the song displayedin the song category, press the button, thenit will skip to the selected song and play.







140



Press the button for less than 0.8 secondsto activate or deactivate the random play-back of the songs within the current cat-egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 sec-onds to randomly play all songs in theentire album of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel themode.

7. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions................................................................ 2-4Starting ......................................................................... 2-5Operating the Manual Transaxle .................................. 2-6Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8Power Adjustable Pedals .............................................2-12Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-12Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................2-13Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-15Driving for Economy ....................................................2-16Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-17Winter Driving ..............................................................2-17Trailer or Vehicle Towing .............................................2-20Vehicle Load Limit ........................................................2-23

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open thewindows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If youhear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, havethe exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the enginein your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshieldare kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interiorfurnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defectsand reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear containor emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

!

BEFORE STARTINGTHE ENGINE

C020A01NF-AAT

Before you start the engine, you shouldalways:

1. Look around the vehicle to be surethere are no flat tires, puddles of oil,water or other indications of possibletrouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be surethe parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lights areclean.

4. Check that the interior and exteriormirrors are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and head-rest to be sure they are in their properpositions.

6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that

are not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to

"ON", check that all appropriate warninglights are operating and that you havesufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lightsand all bulbs when key is in the "ON"position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01E-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with amanual transaxle, place the shift leverin neutral and depress the clutch pedalfully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatictransaxle, place the shift lever in "P"(Park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if

the clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift leveris not in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" positionunless the shift lever is in the "P"(Park) position or the negative batteryterminal is disconnected from the bat-tery. To remove the key, alwaysconfirm that the shift lever is securelypositioned in "P" (Park) (For AutomaticTransaxle).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

WARNING:o All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is moving.Refer to pages: 1-21 through 1-33 formore information on their proper use.

o Always check the surrounding areasnear your vehicle for people,especially children, before putting acar into 'drive'.

! WARNING:Always wear appropriate shoes whenoperating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) may interfere with your ability touse the brake and accelerator pedal,and the clutch (if installed).

! WARNING:When you intend to park or stop thevehicle with the engine on, be careful notto depress the accelerator pedal for along period of time. It may overheat theengine or exhaust system and causefire.


4

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, theignition is on and all accessories may beturned on. If the engine is not running, thekey should not be left in the "ON" position.This will discharge the battery and mayalso damage the ignition system.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, someelectrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beoperated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:If difficulty is experienced in turning theignition key to the START position, turnthe steering wheel right and left to releasethe tension and then turn the key.

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"position.

2. Simultaneously push and turn theignition key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

C070C01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

KEY POSITIONS

C040A02A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition keycylinder while the car is in motion. Thesteering wheel is locked by removingthe key.

C040A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

!

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It willcrank until you release the key.


5

!

STARTING

!

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is neededto move your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C050A01E

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START"position and release it when the enginestarts.After the engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 seconds priorto placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between startingattempts to protect the starter fromoverheating.

C050B02A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place

the gearshift lever (manual transaxle)in neutral or the selector lever (automatictransaxle) in "P" (Park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lightsand gauges are functioning properlybefore starting the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehi-cle will not start unless the clutch pedalis fully depressed. On a manual transaxleequipped vehicle that can be startedwithout depressing the clutch, there isthe potential to cause damage to thevehicle or injury to someone inside oroutside the vehicle as a result of theforward or backward movement of thevehicle that will occur if the clutch is notdepressed when the vehicle is started.

! WARNING:

Always fully depress the brake pedalbefore and while shifting out of the "P"Park position into another position toavoid inadvertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in or aroundthe car.

LOCK ON

START


6

CAUTION:o Do not downshift more than 2 gears or

downshift the gear when the engine isrunning at high speed (5,000 RPM orhigher). Such a downshifting maydamage the engine.

o When downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be takennot to inadvertently press the gearshift lever sideways in such a mannerthat second gear is engaged. Such adrastic downshift may cause theengine speed to increase to the pointthat the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over-revving of the enginemay possibly cause engine damage.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result inpremature wear of the transaxle shiftforks.

When shifting into reverse gear, pull themis-shift prevention tab (1) and shift intoreverse gear position.

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds afteryour car is completely stopped. Thenmove the lever into the reverseposition.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricanthas warmed up. This is normal and notharmful to the transaxle.

o If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral)position and release the clutch. Pressthe clutch pedal back down, and thenshift into 1st or R(Reverse) gearposition.

ONF058005N

!

OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE (5 SPEED M/T)

C070A01NF-AAT

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shiftknob. The transaxle is fully synchronizedin all forward gears so shifting to either ahigher or a lower gear is easilyaccomplished.

C070A01NF-A


7

!C070B02A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the wayto the floor before shifting, then releasedslowly. The clutch pedal should always befully released while driving. Do not restyour foot on the clutch pedal while driving.This can cause unnecessary wear. Do notpartially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessarywear. Use the foot brake or parking braketo hold the car on an incline. Do not operatethe clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering orturning.

o Do not make quick steering wheelmovements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenterthe roadway.

o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. Instead,slow down before pulling back into thetravel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction.Instead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brakingwill help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter crosswinds. This gives you much better controlof your car.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into reverse.The transaxle can be damaged if you donot. To shift into reverse, depress theclutch, move the shift lever to neutral,wait three seconds, then shift to thereverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface, anabrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

C070E02O-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

The shift points as shown on the chart arerecommended for optimum fuel economyand performance.

Shift from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

15 mph (20 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

35 mph (55 km/h)

45 mph (75 km/h)


8

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal when shift-ing.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, orif the battery has been disconnected,may be somewhat abrupt. This is anormal condition, and the shiftingsequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the T.C.M(Transaxle Control Module).

!

C090A02NF

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position whilethe vehicle is moving.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position whenthe ignition is switched "ON". During sportsmode operation, the gear currently in usedisplays in the numeral indicator.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is asfollows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place whenparked or while starting the engine.Whenever parking the car, apply theparking brake and shift the selector leverto the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to thetransaxle.

!

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01NF-GAT

(If Installed)

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has five forward speeds and onereverse speed. The individual speeds areselected automatically, depending on theposition of the speed selector lever. Theselector lever has 2 gates; the main gateand the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gateoperation, refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions.

ONF058006


9

C090E02NF-GAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. Bring the vehicle toa complete stop before shifting the selectorto "D" position. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a five gear sequence.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged.The engine can be started with the shiftlever in "N" position, although this is notrecommended except if the engine stallswhile the car is moving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring thecar to a complete stop before shifting theselector lever to "R" position.

CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must

execute upward shifts in accordancewith prevailing road conditions, takingcare to keep the engine speed belowthe red zone.

o For engine protection, upward shiftsare made automatically when theengine rpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice it is possible toskip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2ndor 5th to 3rd. Since sudden enginebraking and/or rapid acceleration cancause a loss of traction, however,downshifts must be made carefully inaccordance with the vehicle's speed.

!C090F02L-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by pushingthe selector lever from the "D" position intothe manual gate. To return to "D" rangeoperation, push the selector lever backinto the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector leverbackwards and forwards can make rapidgearshifts simple. In contrast to a manualtransaxle, the sports mode allows gearshiftswith the accelerator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selectorforward or backward twice, it is possible toskip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st .

ONF058007

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward

gears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the selectorlever to the "R" or "P" position asrequired.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops,1st gear is automatically selected.


10

!

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" position

only when the vehicle has completelystopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine inreverse or any of the forward positionswith the brakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or"D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Alwaysset the parking brake, shift thetransaxle into "P" (Park) position andturn off the ignition when you leave thevehicle, even momentarily. Neverleave the vehicle unattended whilethe engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have atendency to roll backwards. Shiftingthe shift lever into 2nd gear while inSport mode will help prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel regularly, and add fluid asnecessary.

o See the maintenance schedule forthe proper fluid recommendation.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation,

depress the brake pedal when shiftingfrom "Neutral" position or "Park"position to a forward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shiftlever from the "P" (Park) position toany of the other positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", or "D" position to "P" position.The vehicle must be fully stopped toavoid transaxle damage.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certaingearshifts when the selector lever isoperated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth driv-ing away on a slippery road. Push theselector lever to the -(DOWN) side toshift back to 1st gear.

C090J01NF-GAT

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE

If you cannot move the shift lever from the"P" (Park) position to any other positionwith the brake pedal fully depressed andthe ignition key in the "ON" position, removethe cap on the console and with a thinobject such as a flat-head screwdriver,push the shift lock release button down.Then, with the brake pedal depressed,move the shift lever to the desired position,and then the shift lock release button willautomatically return to its original positionafter shifting from the "P" (Park) position.Then, reinstall the cap.If you need to use the shift lock release, itcould mean your car is developing aproblem. Have the car checked by yourHyundai dealer.

ONF058008


11

!

!

C090N05O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector leverfrom "P" or "N" to any other position withthe accelerator pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into"P" when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shift into"R" or "D".

o Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may be extremelyhazardous. Always leave the vehicle ingear when moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction.Instead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brakingwill help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear may notbe engaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface, anabrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering orturning.

o Do not make quick steering wheelmovements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenterthe roadway.

o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. Instead,slow down before pulling back into thetravel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING:If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt torock the vehicle free by moving it for-ward and backward. Do not attempt thisprocedure if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During the rock-ing operation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backward as it be-comes unstuck, causing injury ordamage to nearby people or objects.

o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-pressing and releasing the acceleratorpedal.


12

!

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)

C120A01FC-AAT

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) isdesigned to prevent wheel lock-up duringsudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module monitorsthe wheel speed and controls the pressureapplied to each brake. Thus, in emergencysituations or on slick roads, ABS willincrease vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lockbrake system or Electronic StabilityControl is functioning properly.

o During ABS or ESC operation, a pul-sation may be felt in the brake pedalwhen the brakes are applied. Also, anoise may be heard in the enginecompartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicatethat the anti-lock brake system orElectronic Stability Control System isfunctioning properly.

Setting the driver's position

1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals

to the front most position by pushing the" " portion of the switch.

3) Adjust the seat position and the steeringwheel angle properly.

4) Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the " " portion of the switch.

5) Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the feel after adjusting.

WARNING:o Adjust the pedals after parking the

vehicle on level ground. Never attemptto adjust the pedals while the vehicleis moving.

o Never adjust the pedals with your footon the accelerator pedal as this mayresult in increasing the engine speedand acceleration.

o Make sure that you can fully depressthe brake pedal before driving.Otherwise, you may not be able tohold down the brake pedal firmly in anemergency stop.

POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

C100A01NF-AAT

(With Automatic Transaxle) (IfInstalled)

To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, turn the ignition key tothe "ON" position with the selector lever inthe "P" position and push the switch.

If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move rearward.If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move forward.

ONF048030N


13

!! WARNING:

ABS or ESC will not prevent accidentsdue to improper or dangerous drivingmaneuvers. Even though vehicle controlis improved during emergency braking,always maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced duringextreme road conditions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system (Elec-tronic Stability Control System) may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS or ESCequipped vehicle should not be tested byhigh speed driving or cornering. Thiscould endanger the safety of yourself orothers.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CON-TROL (ESC) SYSTEM

C310A02NF-AAT

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is designed to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering manuevers. ESC checkswhere you are steering and where thevehicle is actually going. ESC applies thebrakes at individual wheels and intervenesin the engine management system to sta-bilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is an electronic system designed tohelp the driver maintain vehicle controlunder adverse conditions. It is not asubstitute for safe driving practices. Factorsincluding speed, road conditions anddriver steering input can all affect whetherESC will be effective in preventing a lossof control. It is still your responsibility todrive and corner at reasonable speedsand to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

ONF058011N

WARNING:Never drive too fast for the roadconditions or too quickly when cornering.Electronic stability control (ESC) will notprevent accidents. Excessive speed inturns, abrupt maneuvers andhydroplaning on wet surfaces can stillresult in serious accidents. Only a safeand attentive driver can preventaccidents by avoiding maneuvers thatcause the vehicle to lose traction. Evenwith ESC installed, always follow all thenormal precautions for driving - includingdriving at safe speeds for the conditions.


14

C310D01NF-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when theignition key is turned to ON or START butshould go out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or theESC or ESC-OFF indicator does not go outafter 3 seconds, have the vehicle checkedby an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual operation ofthe device while driving, the ESC-OFFindicator illuminates as a warning.If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, driveyour car to a safe place and stop theengine.Then, start the engine again to check if theESC-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after theengine has been started, have your carchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

C310B01NF-AAT

ESC ON/OFF Mode

When the ESC is operating, the ESC indi-cator in the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing theESC switch, the ESC-OFF indicator willcome on and stay on. In the ESC-OFFmode, the stability control will bedeactivated. Adjust your driving accord-ingly. To turn the system back on, press theswitch again. The ESC-OFF indicatorshould go off.

NOTE:The ESC mode will automatically beturned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel sizesmay cause the ESC system tomalfunction. When replacing tires, makesure they are the same size as youroriginal tires.

!


15

!

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A02A-AAT

WARNING:o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,

always set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage thevehicle's transaxle into the parkposition. Vehicles not fully engagedin park with the parking brake set areat risk for moving inadvertently andinjuring yourself or others.

o All vehicles should always have theparking brake fully engaged whenparking to avoid inadvertentmovement of the car which can injureoccupants or pedestrians.

o Nothing should be carried on top ofthe shelf panel behind the rear seat. Ifthere were an accident or a suddenstop, such objects could move forwardand cause damage to the vehicle orinjure the occupants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, applythe brakes lightly until the braking actionreturns to normal, taking care to keep thecar under control at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal, stop assoon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out ofgear. This is extremely hazardous. Keepthe car in gear at all times, use the brakesto slow down, then shift to a lower gear sothat engine braking will help you maintaina safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving canbe dangerous because it can result in thebrakes overheating and losing theireffectiveness. It also increases the wear ofthe brake components.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to besafe to do so, pull off the road and stop ina safe place.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creepforward. To avoid creeping forward,keep your foot firmly on the brake pedalwhen the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic transaxle) or in first or reversegear (manual transaxle). If your car isfacing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car fromrolling. If your car is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb tohelp keep the car from rolling. If there isno curb or if it is required by otherconditions to keep the car from rolling,block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engagedposition. This is most likely to happenwhen there is an accumulation of snowor ice around or near the rear brakes orif the brakes are wet. If there is a risk thatthe parking brake may freeze, apply itonly temporarily while you put the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transaxle to overheat. Alwaysuse the brake pedal or parking brake.


16

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (and not intraffic), turn off your engine and restartonly when you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not re-quire extended warm-up. After the en-gine has started, allow the engine to runfor 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing thevehicle in gear. In very cold weather,however, give your engine a slightlylonger warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in too higha gear resulting in the engine bucking.If this happens, shift to a lower gear.Over-revving is racing the enginebeyond its safe limit. This can be avoidedby shifting at the recommended speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. Theair conditioning system is operated byengine power so your fuel economy isreduced when you use it.

o Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pressure.Incorrect inflation, either too much ortoo little, results in unnecessary tirewear. Check the tire pressures at leastonce a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment can resultfrom hitting curbs or driving too fast overirregular surfaces. Poor alignmentcauses faster tire wear and may alsoresult in other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. Forbetter fuel economy and reducedmaintenance costs, maintain your carin accordance with the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If you drive yourcar in severe conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required (see Section 5for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximumservice, your Hyundai should be keptclean and free of corrosive materials. Itis especially important that mud, dirt,ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulateon the underside of the car. This extraweight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to cor-rosion.

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles fromyour car if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at amoderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit"starts or full-throttle shifts and maintaina steady cruising speed. Don't racebetween stoplights. Try to adjust yourspeed to that of the other traffic so youdon't have to change speeds unneces-sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distancefrom other vehicles so you can avoidunnecessary braking. This also reducesbrake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The fasteryou drive, the more fuel your car uses.Driving at a moderate speed, especiallyon the highway, is one of the mosteffective ways to reduce fuelconsumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.This can increase fuel consumption andalso increase wear on thesecomponents. In addition, driving withyour foot resting on the brake pedal maycause the brakes to overheat, whichreduces their effectiveness and maylead to more serious consequences.


17SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally,corners should always be taken undergentle acceleration. If you follow thesesuggestions, tire wear will be held to aminimum.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions ofwinter result in greater wear and otherproblems. To minimize the problems ofwinter driving, you should follow thesesuggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires or to installtire chains on your tires. If snow tires areneeded, it is necessary to select tiresequivalent in size and type of the originalequipment tires. Failure to do so mayadversely affect the safety and handling ofyour car. Furthermore, speeding, rapidacceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially veryhazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine braking tothe fullest extent. Sudden brake applicationson snowy or icy roads may cause skids tooccur. You need to keep sufficient distancebetween the vehicle in operation in frontand your vehicle. Also, apply the brakegently. It should be noted that installing tirechains on the tire will provide a greaterdriving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

WINTER DRIVING

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect the batteryand cables as described in Section 6. Thelevel of charge in your battery can bechecked by your Hyundai dealer or aservice station.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubricatesthe water pump and prevents freezing. Besure to replace or replenish your coolant inaccordance with the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. Before winter, haveyour coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for thetemperatures anticipated during the winter.


18

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice canbuild up under the fenders and interferewith the steering. When driving in severewinter conditions where this may happen,you should periodically check underneaththe car to be sure the movement of the frontwheels and the steering components isnot obstructed.

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes arewet. If there is a risk the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while youput the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic)or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on thecontainer. Window washer anti-freeze isavailable from Hyundai dealers and mostauto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolantor other types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the paint finish.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into thekey opening. If a lock is covered with ice,squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid toremove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,you may be able to thaw it out by using aheated key. Handle the heated key withcare to avoid injury.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described inSection 6 and replace them if necessary.Also check all ignition wiring andcomponents to be sure they are not cracked,worn or damaged in any way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that alower viscosity "winter weight" oil be usedduring cold weather. See Section 9 forrecommendations. If you aren't sure whatweight oil you should use, consult yourHyundai dealer.


19

!

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weatherwhere you drive your car, you should carryappropriate emergency equipment. Someof the items you may want to carry includetire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight,emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumpercables, a window scraper, gloves, groundcloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to speci-fication. Low tire inflation pressures willresult in overheating and possible failureof the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget to checkboth engine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

can cause poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. Always check tires areproperly inflated before driving. Referto pages 2-23 and 8-3 for proper tirepressures and further information.

o Driving on tires with no or insufficienttread is dangerous. Worn-out tirescan result in loss of vehicle control,collisions, injury, and even death.Worn-out tires should be replaced assoon as possible and should never beused for driving. Always check tiretread before driving your car. Referto 8-10 for further information andtread limits.


20

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ballcombination, making sure that its locationis compatible with that of the trailer orvehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch whichdistributes the tongue load uniformlythroughout the chassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to thecar and installed by a qualified technician.DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FORTEMPORARY INSTALLATION ANDNEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHESONLY TO THE BUMPER.C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it isproperly installed and operating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. See MaintenanceUnder Severe Usage Conditions" onpage 5-6.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

!

C190A01TG-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car,you should first check with your State'sDepartment of Motor Vehicles to determinetheir legal requirements.Since laws vary from State to State therequirements for towing trailers, cars, orother types of vehicles or apparatus maydiffer. Ask your Hyundai dealer for furtherdetails before towing.

CAUTION:o Do not do any towing with your car

during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km)in order to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine ortransaxle damage.

o When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Hyundai dealer for furtherinformation on additional require-ments such as a towing kit, etc.

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct op-eration and always keep them clean. Whendriving during the day in conditions of poorvisibility, it is helpful to drive with headlightson low beam. This enables you to be seen,as well as to see.


21

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yourcar and the trailer or vehicle you are towingfail, the trailer or vehicle could wanderdangerously across other lanes of trafficand ultimately leave the roadway. Toeliminate this potentially dangeroussituation, safety chains, attached betweenyour car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades

(in excess of 6%) pay close attentionto the engine coolant temperaturegauge to ensure the engine does notoverheat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves across thedial towards "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as it is safe to do so, andallow the engine to idle until it coolsdown. You may proceed once theengine has cooled sufficiently.

!

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

2. The total gross vehicle weight withtrailer must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shownon the vehicle identification plate (seepage 8-2). The total gross vehicleweight is the combined weight of thevehicle, driver, all passengers andtheir luggage, cargo, hitch, trailertongue load and other optionalequipment.

C190E01NF-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the totaltrailer load.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load inthe trailer.This can be verified by checking thetotal weight of the loaded trailer andthen checking the load on the tongue.

C190E01JM

x 100 = 10% (MAX)Total trailer weight

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight

in the back than in the front. About60% of the trailer load should be in thefront half on the trailer and theremaining 40% in the rear.


22

C190F01Y-GAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safetychain connections as well as properoperation of the trailer running lights,brake lights, and turn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal conditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance,do not tow a trailer with the transaxle infifth gear (manual transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure ofall tires on the trailer and your car. Lowtire pressure can seriously affect thehandling. Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is moreaffected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle,keep a constant speed and steer straightahead. If there is too much windbuffeting, slow down to get out of theother vehicle's air turbulence.

!

lbs(kg)

!

Tongue

100 (45)

-

With 3.3LBrake 2.4LWithout Brake

Maximum Towable WeightTrailer

1000 (450)1000 (450)500 (225)

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed thevalues in the chart below.

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steer-ing and braking performance causinga crash which could cause seriousinjury or death.

o Towing a trailer affects vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance whenbraking.

o Be careful when driving in slipperyand windy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and whiledriving up and down hills.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identi-fication plate (see page 8-2). It ispossible that your towing packagedoes not exceed the GVWR butexceeds the GAWR. Improper trailerloading and/or too much luggage inthe trunk can overload the rear axle.Redistribute the load and check theaxle weight again.


23

8. When parking your car and trailer, es-pecially on a hill, be sure to follow allthe normal precautions. Turn your frontwheel into the curb, set the parkingbrake firmly, and put the transaxle in 1stor Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic).In addition, place wheel chocks at eachof the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving, andthen apply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

10. During your trip, check occasionally tobe sure that the load is secure, and thatthe lights and any trailer brakes are stillworking.

11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden accelerationor sudden stops.

12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lanechanges.

13. Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, resultingin reduced braking efficiency.

14. When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brakingeffect.When ascending a long grade, down-shift the transaxle to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances ofengine overloading and/or overheat-ing.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when tow-ing, (the temperature gauge reads nearred zone), taking the following actionmay reduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral andidle the engine at a higher speed.

!

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F02JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

ONF058021N

15. If you have to stop while going uphill,do not hold the vehicle in place bypressing on the accelerator. This cancause the automatic transaxle to over-heat. Use the parking brake orfootbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

Type A

Type B

ONF058022N


24

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Vehicle capacity weight:860 lbs (390 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weight in-cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,Rear seat: 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry. However theseating capacity may be reduced basedupon the weight of all of the occupants,and the weight of the cargo being car-ried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as there isa limit to the total weight, or load limitincluding occupants and cargo, thevehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:Towing capacity is the maximum trailerweight including its cargo weight, yourvehicle can tow. See the section "Traileror Vehicle Towing" for specificationsabout the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on theweight and the number of occupantsand the tongue load, if your vehicle isequipped with a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

(1)Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs'' onyour vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.


25

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(499 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.


26

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side center pillar outer panel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01A


27

! ! WARNING:o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possible tirefailure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-dling vehicle damage, tire failure,or increased stopping distancescould result in serious injury ordeath.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can calcu-late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehicle.Be careful not to overload yourvehicle.

WARNING:o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR andvehicle capacity weight. If you do,parts, including tires on your ve-hicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.


28

! WARNING:Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they move as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passenger.

If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 3-5Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-9If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-10Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-10If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed................................... 3-15Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-17If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-18 3


3

32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT

D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally butDoes Not Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check

all connectors at ignition, coil and sparkplugs. Reconnect any that may be dis-connected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualifiedassistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

If the engine stalls at a crossroad andcrossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or cross-ing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral)position and then push the vehicle to a safeplace.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result ina collision or cause other damage. Inaddition, push or pull starting may causethe catalytic converter to be overloadedand create a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"or "P" and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

ONF078017

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dimsor goes out when you operate the starter,the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it.See instructions for "Jump Starting".

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immediatelyremove any contaminated clothing andflush the area with clean water for atleast 15 minutes. Then promptly obtainmedical attention. If you must be trans-ported to an emergency facility, continueto apply water to the affected area witha sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highlyexplosive. Do not smoke or allow aspark or an open flame in the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide thejump start must be 12-volt. If you cannotdetermine that it is a 12-volt battery, donot attempt to use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a dischargedbattery, follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, be sure the two vehiclesare not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights andacces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable inthe exact location shown on the illustra-tion. First, attach one clamp of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe discharged battery.

Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe booster battery. Next, using the othercable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery.Then attach the other end of that cableto a solid metal part of the engine of thevehicle with the discharged batteryaway from the battery. Do not connectthe cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a fewminutes. This will help to assure that thebooster battery is fully charged. Duringthe jumping operation, run the enginein this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the enginestarts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fast idleor about 2,000 rpm for several minutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were lefton, etc.), have the charging system checkedby your Hyundai dealer.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highlyexplosive. If these instructions are notfollowed exactly, serious personal injuryand damage to the vehicle may occur! Ifyou are not sure how to follow thisprocedure, seek qualified assistance.Automobile batteries contain sulfuricacid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on thecar.

HNF4001

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

!

!

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from movingparts such as the fan and drive belts toprevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop theengine immediately and call the nearestHyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause se-rious burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheat-ing, wait until the enginetemperature has returned to normal.Then, if coolant has been lost, carefullyadd coolant to the reservoir (page 6-9)to bring the fluid level in the reservoir upto the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. Ifoverheating happens again, call aHyundai dealer for assistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there isa leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power, orhear loud pinging or knocking, the engineis probably too hot. If this happens, youshould:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as itis safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or neutral (manualtransaxle) and set the parking brake. Ifthe air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe car or steam is coming out from thehood, stop the engine. Do not open thehood until the coolant has stoppedrunning or the steaming has stopped. Ifthere is no visible loss of engine coolantand no steam, leave the engine runningand check to be sure the engine coolingfan is operating. If the fan is not running,turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive beltis missing. If it is not missing, check tosee that it is tight. If the drive belt seemsto be satisfactory, check for coolantleaking from the radiator, hoses or underthe car. (If the air conditioning had beenin use, it is normal for cold water to bedraining from it when you stop).


5TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

ONF048131

C320A01JM-AAT

➀ TPMS Malfunction Indicator➁ Low Tire Pressure Telltale

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthly whencold and inflated to the inflation pres-sure recommended by the vehicle manu-facturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you should de-termine the proper tire inflation pres-sure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-tale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not operat-ing properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is provided by a separate tell-tale, which displays the symbol "TPMS"when illuminated. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-functions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheelson the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltaleafter replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

36


!Low tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem warning telltale is illuminated, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.Immediately reduce your speed, avoidhard cornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances. You should stopand check your tires as soon as pos-sible. Inflate the tires to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pillarouter panel. If you cannot reach a ser-vice station or if the tire cannot hold thenewly added air, replace the low pres-sure tire with the temporary spare tire.Then the TPMS malfunction indicatoror the Low Tire Pressure telltale mayturn on after restarting and about 20minutes of continuous driving beforeyou have the low-pressure tire repairedand reinstalled on the vehicle.

CAUTION:In winter or cold weather, the low tirepressure telltale may be illuminatedif the tire pressure was adjusted tothe recommended tire inflation pres-sure in warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunctioningbecause the decreased temperatureleads to a proportional lowering oftire pressure.When you drive your vehicle from awarm area to a cold area or from acold area to a warm area, or theoutside temperature is greatly higheror lower, you should check the tireinflation pressure and adjust the tiresto the recommended tire inflationpressure.Always check your tire inflation pres-sures when the tires are cold, beforeyou have driven on them.

WARNING - Low pressureSignificantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contrib-ute to loss of vehicle control andincreased braking distances. Contin-ued driving on low pressure tires willcause the tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tire pressure moni-toring system) malfunctionindicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator turnson and stays on when there is a problemwith the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem. If the system is able to correctlydetect an under-inflation warning at thesame time as system failure then it willilluminate both the TPMS malfunctionand the low tire pressure telltale, e.g. ifthe Front Left sensor fails, the TPMSmalfunction indicator turns on, but if theFront Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tireis under-inflated, the low tire pressuretelltale may turn on at the same time asthe TPMS malfunction indicator.

!


7

Have the system checked by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of theproblem.

NOTE:o The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicleis operated in areas close to elec-tric power supply cables or radiotransmitters such as near policestations, government and publicoffices, broadcasting stations,military installations, airports, ortransmitting towers, etc. which caninterfere with normal operation ofthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS).

o The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if snow chainsor some electronic devices, suchas notebook computers, are usedin the vehicle. This can interferewith normal operation of the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

o If there is a failed tire sensor, it ispossible for the TPMS to tempo-rarily learn a replacement sensorif closely driven to another vehiclethat is also equipped with TPMS.In rare cases, this may tempo-rarily delay the TPMS malfunctionindicator from turning on.

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Have theflat tire repaired by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible or replacethe flat tire with the temporary sparetire. NEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside the tirebehind the valve stem. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It is recom-mended that you always have your tiresserviced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

After you replace the low pressure tirewith the spare tire, the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may illuminate after restartingand driving for about 20 minutes.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflatedto the recommended pressure and in-stalled on the vehicle, the TPMS mal-function indicator and the low tire pres-sure telltale will extinguish. If the lowpressure and TPMS malfunction indi-cators are not extinguished after about20 minutes of continuous driving, pleasevisit an authorized Hyundai dealer.You may not be able to identify a low tireby simply looking at it. Always use agood quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.Please note that a tire that is hot (frombeing driven) will have a higher pres-sure measurement than a tire that iscold (from sitting stationary for at least3 hours and driven less than 1 mileduring that 3 hour period). Allow the tireto cool before measuring the inflationpressure.

38


!!

!Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pressure.A cold tire means the vehicle has beensitting for 3 hours and driven for lessthan 1 mile in that 3 hour period.

NOTE:o Do not use any tire sealant if your

vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

o In order for the system to correctlymonitor tires for under-inflation,there should be a total of 4 sen-sors, one fitted to each of the fourwheel positions. There should beno other sensors in the vehicleincluding for the spare tire. Thiscould cause the system to moni-tor the wrong sensor.

WARNING - TPMSo The TPMS cannot alert you to se-

vere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability,take your foot off the acceleratorand slowly move to a safe positionoff the road.

WARNING:Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired op-eration.

WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.


9

!

SPARE TIRE

D040A03GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/80 D16

420 KPA(60 PSI)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

!

WARNING:The temporary spare tire is for emer-gency use only. Do not operate yourvehicle on this temporary spare atspeeds over 50 mph (80 kmh). Theoriginal tire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possible toavoid failure of the spare possiblyleading to personal injury or death.

310


CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and that the parkingbrake is set, then:

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the car slow down while drivingstraight ahead. Do not apply the brakesimmediately or attempt to pull off theroad as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the car has slowed tosuch a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on firm, level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the twotraffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxle in"P" (automatic) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire according to the in-structions provided as follows.

D060A01NF-A

D040B01NF-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

To remove the spare tire, take out thetool receptacle and remove the installa-tion bolt by turning it counterclockwise.After replacing the spare tire, install andtighten the bolt firmly with your fingersuntil there is no more play in the sparetire.

HNF4008


11

D060B01NF-GAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

7D060B01NF-A

Take out the tool receptacle and turnthe installation bolt counterclockwiseto remove spare tire from the trunk.

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

HNF4009

Flat tire

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

ONF068002

312


!

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

7HNF4025

Wrench barWheel nutwrench

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060E01NF-A


13

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

D060G01NF-A

! WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub.

D060G02NF

!If there is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, thewheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

WARNING:

314


D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extension pipeover the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

7D060I01NF

HNF4013-A

D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060H01NF-A


15

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

HNF5016-A

it is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should bedone by your Hyundai dealer or acommercial tow truck service. This willhelp assure that your vehicle is not dam-aged in towing. Also, professionals aregenerally aware of local laws governingtowing. In any case, rather than risk damageto your car, it is suggested that you showthis information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is usedand that all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbedequipment with all the wheels off theground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position.

316


CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care

not to cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

!

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the frontwheels on the ground, use a towingdolly under the front wheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, placethe ignition key in the "ACC" positionand put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or in the"LOCK" position when towing from therear without a towing dolly.

D080B01NF

!

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with therear wheels on the ground, be sure theparking brake is released.

D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

HNF4015

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1)

2)

3) dolly


17

!

D080B02NF

CAUTION:

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

A vehicle with an automatic transaxleshould never be towed from the rear withthe front wheels on the ground. This cancause serious damage to the transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D01NF-AAT

!

D080D02NF-A

For emergency towing when no commer-cial tow vehicle is available, attach a towcable, chain or strap to the towing hookunder the front of your car. Do not attemptto tow your vehicle in this manner on anyunpaved surface. This could result inserious damage to your car.Nor should towing be attempted if thewheels, drive train, axles, steering orbrakes are damaged. Before towing, besure the transaxle is in neutral and the keyis in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the"ON" position (with the engine running). Adriver must be in the towed car to steer itand operate the brakes.

CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that thetransaxle is in neutral. Do not tow atspeeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h)and for more than 15 miles (25 km). Besure the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position. A drivermust be in the towed vehicle to operatethe steering and brakes.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

318


IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundaidealers can make you a new key if youhave your key number.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundaidealers can use special tools to open thedoor for you.

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside of thecar is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car atleast once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winteris over.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the componentsunder the fenders and other areas thatare hidden from view. Do a thoroughjob; just dampening the accumulatedmud rather than washing it away willaccelerate corrosion rather than preventit. Water under high pressure and steamare particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosivematerials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. Forexample, corrosion is accelerated by highhumidity, particularly when temperaturesare just above freezing. In such conditions,the corrosive material is kept in contactwith the car surfaces by moisture that isslow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it isslow to dry and holds moisture in contactwith the vehicle. Although the mud appearsto be dry, it can still retain the moisture andpromote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dispersed.For all these reasons, it is particularlyimportant to keep your car clean and freeof mud or accumulations of other materials.This applies not only to the visible surfacesbut particularly to the underside of the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularlyimportant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and industrialpollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion onyour car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

o Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leaveunprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-rosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highestquality. However, this is only part of the job.To achieve the long-term corrosionresistance your Hyundai can deliver, theowner's cooperation and assistance is alsorequired.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be sure thecarpeting is dry. Use particular care if youcarry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favorableenvironment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car in thegarage or drive it into the garage when it isstill wet or covered with snow, ice or mud.Even a heated garage can contribute tocorrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A02A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface ishot from being in the sun. Always washyour car in the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasiveand can scratch the paint if it is not removed.Air pollution or acid rain may damage thepaint and trim through chemical action ifpollutants are allowed to remain in contactwith the surface. If you live near the oceanor in an area where road salts or dustcontrol chemicals are used, you shouldpay particular attention to the underside ofthe car. Start by rinsing the car to removedust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you havedriven through mud or muddy water, besure to thoroughly clean the underside aswell. Use a hard direct stream of water toremove accumulations of mud or corrosivematerials. Use a good quality car-washingsolution and follow the manufacturer'sdirections on the package. These areavailable at your Hyundai dealer or autoparts outlet. Don't use strong householddetergents, gasoline, strong solvents orabrasive cleaning powders as these maydamage the finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse itfrequently and don't damage the finish byrubbing too hard. For stubborn spots,dampen them frequently and remove thema little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept openso that moisture can escape and notbe trapped inside to ac-celeratecorrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in GoodCondition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility ofcorrosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highlycorrosive and may damage paintedsurfaces in just a few hours. Always removebird droppings as soon as possible.


4

If you find any nicks or scratches in thepaint, use touch-up paint to cover them toprevent corrosion. To protect the paintworkof the car against corrosion, you mustclean your Hyundai (at least once a month).Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of thesplashboards of the car. Make sure that theoutlets and the underside of the doors areopen. Paint damage can be caused bysmall accumulation of tar, industrialprecipitation, tree resin, insects and birddroppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough toremove the accumulated dirt, use a mildcar washing solution. Be sure to rinse thesurface after washing to remove thesolution. Never allow the solution to dry onthe painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, usea mild soap or neutral detergent. Do notuse abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing andwaxing. Because aluminum is subject tocorrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloywheels special attention in winter. If youdrive on salted roads, clean the wheelsthoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly.If soapy water dries on the finish, streakingwill result.

When the weather is warm and the humiditylow, you may find it necessary to rinse eachsection immediately after washing to avoidstreaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a dampchamois or soft, absorbent cloth. Thereason for drying the car is to remove waterfrom the car so it will dry without waterspots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish.

CAUTION:!

OJB037800

o Water washing in the engine compart-ment including high pressure waterwashing may cause the failure of elec-trical circuits located in the enginecompartment.

o Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/elec-tronic components inside the vehicleas this may damage them.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surfaceto loosen the dirt, then wipe with a cleandamp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stainsare not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not usegasoline, solvent, paint thinner or otherstrong cleaners.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed topreserve the appearance of the bumperson your Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyteor hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers.If you do, wash it off immediately withclean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumpersur-faces. They are made of soft plasticand the surface can be damaged ifmistreated. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Use warm water and mildsoap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you haveyour car repainted, do not leave thebumpers on the car if the car is going tobe placed in a high-temperature paintbooth.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car againwhen water no longer beads on a cleansurface but spreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car beforepolishing or waxing or using a combinationcleaner and wax. Use a good qualitycommercial product and follow themanufacturer's directions on the container.Polish and wax the bright trim pieces aswell as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or cor-rosive cleaning agents. These candamage the finish of the car. To removeroad tar, use turpentine on a clean, softcloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, usewarm water and mild soap or car-washingsolution. Soak the spot and rub gently. Ifthe paint has lost its luster, use acommercial car-cleaning polish.


6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergent andwarm water. Do not use strong detergents,dye, bleach or abrasive materials on theseat belts as this may weaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them forexcessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signsof damage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleanersof this type are available in aerosol cans inliquid form or powder. Read the instructionsand follow them exactly. Using a vacuumcleaner with the appropriate attachment,remove as much dirt from the carpets aspossible. Apply the foam following themanufacturer's directions, then rub inoverlapping circles. Do not add water.These cleaners work best when the carpetis kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care ofyour car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However, whencleaning the inside of the rear window becareful not to damage the rear windowdefroster wiring.

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leatherupholstered surfaces will, like any material,pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirtmust be cleaned off or it may work into thesurface of the leather, causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washing leatherthoroughly with soap and water will keepyour leather lustrous, beautiful and ensureyou have many years of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using anymild soap and lukewarm water, work up agood lather. Thoroughly wash the leather.Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth anddry with soft cloth. Do this as often as theleather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oilsare incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life of theleather. Oil applied to the finished surfacewill in no way help the leather and may domore harm than good. Varnishes andfurniture polishes should never be usedunder any conditions.

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such asinspections, adjustments andreplacements that are listed in themaintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed atthe intervals shown in the maintenanceschedule to assure that your warrantyremains in effect. Although it is stronglyrecommended that they be performed bythe trained technicians at your Hyundaidealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundaiservice parts be used for any requiredrepairs or replacements. Other parts ofequivalent quality such as engine oil,engine coolant, manual or auto transaxleoil, brake fluid and so on which are notsupplied by Hyundai Motor Company or itsdistributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you shouldalways be sure these are equivalent to thequality of the original Hyundai parts. YourOwner's Handbook provides furtherinformation about your warranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatestnumber of miles of satisfying operationfrom your Hyundai, certain maintenanceprocedures must be performed. Althoughcareful design and engineering havereduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these main-tenance procedures performed to complywith the terms of the warranties coveringyour new Hyundai. The Owner's Handbooksupplied with your new vehicle providesfurther information about these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

F020A02Y-AAT

o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained todemonstrate compliance withconditions of the emissions systemwarranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow theprescribed maintenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you shouldperform when you drive your Hyundai oryou fill the fuel tank. A list of these items willbe found on page 6-4.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a fewtools that are required and want to take thetime to do so, you can inspect and servicea number of items. For more informationabout doing it yourself, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundaiserviced, keep copies of the servicerecords in your glove box. This will helpensure that you can document that therequired procedures have beenperformed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your ownmaintenance and repairs, you may findit helpful to have an official HyundaiShop Manual. A copy of this publicationmay be purchased at your Hyundaidealer's parts department.


4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B04NF-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

F030A01NF-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicleemission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whicheveroccurs first.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

VALVE CLEARANCE

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

I

I

I

15

24

12

R

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

R

I

I

I

30

48

24

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

R

I

I

I

45

72

36

R

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

R

I

I

I

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

I

I

R

I

R

67.5

108

54

R

I

I

I

75

120

60

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

R

I

I

I

90

144

72

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

I

I

I

R

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

R

I

I

I

120

192

96

R

I

I

I

I

R

I

R

127.5

204

102

R

I

I

I

135

216

108

R

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

R

I

I

I

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R


5

See Note *1

See Note *2

F030C01NF-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON, W/PUMP)

COOLANT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

I

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

I

I

60

96

48

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

I

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

I

I

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

I

I

I

120

192

96

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

I

I

I

150

240

120

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Note:*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.

AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.*2. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGECONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) innormal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezingtemperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

F040A02NF-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart belowfor the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

C, E

A, C, E, F, G, H, I


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Con-nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Have atrained technician replace any damagedor leaking parts immediately.

F060B01NF-GAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturationand replace if necessary. Drive belts shouldbe checked periodically for proper tension.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changedat the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the car is beingdriven in severe conditions, more frequentoil and filter changes are required.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at whichthe vehicle may be driven, damage theemission system and cause hard starting.If an excessive amount of foreign matteraccumulates in the fuel tank, the filter mayrequire replacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaks atthe connections. Fuel filters should beinstalled by trained technicians.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indicatedeterioration. Particular attention shouldbe paid to examine those hose surfacesnearest to high heat sources, such as theexhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they are secure,and that no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS


8

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engine andtransaxle are at normal operatingtemperature. Check the automatictransaxle fluid level with the engine runningand the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. UseHYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMONDATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brandsmeeting the SP III specification approvedby Hyundai Motor Co. when adding orchanging fluid. Using the wrong ATF mayresult in damage to the ATM.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parkingbrake system including the parking brakelever and cables. For detailed serviceprocedures, refer to the Shop Manual.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. Make sure thata new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctlyreplaced. F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil accordingto the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possibleleaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if necessary. Aqualified technician should perform theoperation.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, mufflerandhangers for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Checkair conditioning performance according tothe relevant shop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage.Replace any damaged parts and, ifnecessary, repack the grease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt andHoses

Check the power steering pump and hosesfor leakage and damage. Replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.Inspect the power steering belt for evidenceof cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oilinessand proper tension. Replace or adjust it ifnecessary.

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, UpperArm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in thesteering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage.Check the dust boots and ball joints fordeterioration, cracks, or damage. Replaceany damaged parts.


10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

F080A01NF-AAT

Perchlorate Material-special handling mayapply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, such asairbag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners andkeyless remote entry batteries, must bedisposed of according to Title 22 CaliforniaCode of Regulations Section 67384.10(a).

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Changing the Engine Oil and Filter ................................ 6-6Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-14Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-15Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-17Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-18Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-19Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-22Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-22Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-24Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-26Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-27Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-28Bulb Wattages ............................................................. 6-36Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-37

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010B01NF-AAT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ONF018003

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objectscarefully so that the plastic coverof the engine is not damaged.

!

1. Engine coolant reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box6. Negative battery terminal7. Positive battery terminal8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*

9. Radiator cap10. Engine oil dipstick11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir12. Power steering fluid reservoir

* : if installed

Gasoline Engine (2.4L)

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

8G010A01NF

G010A01NF-AAT

Gasoline Engine (3.3L)

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objectscarefully so that the plastic coverof the engine is not damaged.

!

1. Engine coolant reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box6. Negative battery terminal7. Positive battery terminal8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*

9. Radiator cap10. Engine oil dipstick11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir12. Power steering fluid reservoir

* : if installed


4

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked eachtime when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation

(and air conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking

brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including

clutch operationo Automatic transaxle operation,

including "Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sun visor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioningcorrectly, inspect it carefully and seekassistance from your Hyundai dealer ifservice is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regu-larly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter conditiono Engine vibration

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet thefollowing classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performanceand service of the engine. It is suggestedthat you check the oil level at least once aweek in normal use and more often if youare on a trip or driving in severe conditions.


5

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil LevelBefore checking the oil, warm up the engineto the normal operating temperature andbe sure your car is parked on level ground.Turn the engine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dipstick,wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick andwithdraw it again. Then note the highestlevel the oil has reached on the dipstick. Itshould be between the upper ("F") andlower ("L") range.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as itmay be hot enough to burn you.

ONF078002

G030C02NF

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20

(5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil ispreferred.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, a secondary recom-mended engine oil for correspondingtemperature range can be used. Seepage 9-4


6

!

!

G030D01O-AAT

Adding Oil1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it

counter-clockwise.2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do

not overfill.3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marksis equal to about 1 quart of oil.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage tothe engine.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

If the oil level is close to or below the "L"mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.To add oil:

ONF078003

G030D02NF

(3.3L)

(2.4L)

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ANDFILTER

G040A02NF-AAT

HNF5005

(3.3L)

(2.4L)

G040A01NF

Oil filter

Oil fillercap

Oil leveldipstick

Oil fillercap

Oil filter


7

!

3. Slide underneath the car and loosenthe drain plug by turning it counter-clockwise with a wrench of the propersize. Be sure that a drain pan is inposition to catch the oil as it drains out,then remove the drain plug.

4. When the oil has stopped draining,replace the drain plug using a newgasket and retighten by turning it clock-wise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:25.3 ~ 32.5 lb.ft (3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m)

HNF5006-1

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

The engine oil and filter should be changedat those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule in Section 5. If thecar is being driven in severe conditions,more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

The procedure for changing the oil andfilter is as follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and letit warm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above thelowest mark. Turn the engine off andplace the gear selector lever in "P" (au-tomatic) or reverse gear (manualtransaxle).

2. Open the hood and remove the engineoil filler cap.

NOTE:Loosen the oil filter cap by turning itcounterclockwise to drain well the oil inthe oil filter (3.3L only).

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engineoil as it may be hot enough to burn you!

HNF5005-1

G040B01NF


8 CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure andmay erupt through the opening if the capis removed. You could be seriouslyburned if you do not observe thisprecaution. Do not remove the radiatorcap until the radiator is cool to the touch.

!

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of theproper size. A certain amount of oil willcome out when you remove the filter. So besure to have your drain pan in placeunderneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filteritself. Do not over-tighten.

Tightening torque:8.7 ~ 11.6 lb.ft (1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m)

Be sure that the mounting surface on theengine is clean and that the old gasket isremoved completely. Lubricate the newgasket on the filter with clean engine oilbefore installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification inchapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage tothe engine.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. Itis suggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service stationfor reclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it into the household trash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:This product contains a chemical knownto the State of California to cause cancer.Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact withthe skin for prolonged periods of time.Used engine oil contains chemicals thathave caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughly withsoap and warm water as soon as possibleafter handling used oil.

!

9. Start the engine and check to be sure nooil is leaking from the drain plug or oilfilter.

10. Shut off the engine and recheck the oillevel.


9

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolantin a 50/50 mix with water. The enginecoolant should be compatible withaluminum engine parts. Additionalcorrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentrationand type of engine coolant to preventfreezing and corrosion. Never allow theconcentration of antifreeze to exceed the60% level or go below the 35% level, ordamage to the cooling system may result.For proper concentration when adding orreplacing the engine coolant, refer to thefollowing table.

G050C01NF-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the sideof the plastic coolant reservoir. The level ofthe coolant should be between the "L" and"F" lines on the reservoir when the engineis warm with it at idle . If the level is belowthe "L" mark, add engine coolant to bringit up to "F". If the level is low, inspect forcoolant leaks and recheck the fluid levelfrequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01NF

G050D01NF-GAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed atthose intervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the finish

of your car. If you spill engine coolanton the car, wash it off thoroughly withclean water.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.Do not use hard water. Hard water cancause engine damage from corro-sion, overheating or freezing.

!

1. Park the car on level ground, set theparking brake and remove the radiatorcap when cool.

Ambienttemperature

°F (°C)5 (-15)

-13 (-25)-31 (-35)-49 (-45)

65%60%50%40%

35%40%50%60%

WaterAntifreezesolution

Engine Coolant concentration


10

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator.Allow all the engine coolant to drainfrom the cooling system, and thensecurely close the drain cock.

4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then,following the manufacturer's directionson the engine coolant container, addthe appropriate quantity of coolant tothe radiator.

5. Slowly fill the radiator with the propercoolant mixture (see the "Recom-mended Engine Coolant in previouspage) until the fluid level stays up in theradiator neck. And pump the radiatorhose in order to bleed the air.

HNF5008

2. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiatorcap and slowly turn the radiator capcounterclockwise without pressingdown on it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in the coolingsystem. When you are sure that all thepressure has been released, removethe radiator cap by pushing down andturning counterclockwise.

G050D02NF-A G050D01NF

6. Run the engine at idle until the coolantcirculates. If the cooling fan operatesand the coolant starts to circulate, addthe coolant to the reservoir.

7. To bleed the air in the cooling system,repeat procedure 6 until the cooling fanoperates 3~5 times.

8. Replace the radiator cap and turn it untiltightly installed. And then, add coolantto the reservoir until the level is between"L" and "F".

9. Stop the engine and check the coolantlevel when the engine is cool. The levelof the coolant should be the "L" and "F"lines on the reservoir. If the level isbelow the "L" line, repeat the procedure4~8 until the level between "L" and "F".


11

!

!

10. Replace the reservoir cap and check tobe sure the drain cock and the radiatorcap are fully closed and not leaking.

CAUTION:Recheck after a few days and add thecoolant if the level is below the "L" level.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when theengine is not running. Use extremecaution when working near the blades ofthe coolant fan so that you are not injuredby a rotating fan blade. As the enginecoolant temperature decreases, the fanwill automatically shut off. This is anormal condition.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without using

a proper air cleaner filter in place canresult in excessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter,be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may resultin damage to the air cleaner filter.

!

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of the air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be

lifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.

ONF078011


12

HHR5048

(1)

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefullyinspected from time to time and cleaned toremove accumulations of road film or otherdebris. To clean the wiper blades andarms, use a clean sponge or cloth with amild soap or detergent and water. If thewipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundaireplacement parts or their equivalent.

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear ofthe wiper blades and may scratch theglass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical position.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach it fromthe wiper arm.

G080A01NF-A2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull it

up.

HHR5049


13

HHR5051

HHR5050

FILLING THE WASHERRESERVOIR

G090A02NF-AAT

G090A02NF

ONF078009

(3.3L)

(2.4L)To install the wiper blade

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiperarm and lower the wiper blade at thelevel of the wiper arm as shown in thedrawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end ofthe wiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall againstthe windshield.

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid tothe windshield washer system.


14

CAUTION:o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washersystem because it will damage thecar's finish.

o The washer lever should not be pulledand the washer should not be operatedif the washer reservoir is empty. Thiscan damage the washer fluid pump.

!

A good quality washer fluid should beused to fill the washer reservoir. The fluidlevel should be checked more frequentlyduring bad weather or whenever thewasher system is in more frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2U.S. quarts (4.0 liters).

! WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxleoil level when the engine is cool or cold.If the engine is hot, you should exercisegreat caution to avoid burning yourselfon hot engine or exhaust parts.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEOIL (MANUAL)

G100A02NF-AAT

HNF5010

Filler plugDrain plug

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is1.8 U.S. quarts (1.75 liters).

! WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents con-

tain some amounts of alcohol and canbe flammable under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparks or flameto contact the washer fluid or thewasher fluid reservoir. Damage tothe vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonousto humans and animals. Do not drinkwindshield washer fluid. Serious injuryor death could occur.

NOTE:It is recommended that the manualtransaxle fluid should be checked by anauthorized Hyundai Dealer.


15CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxleshould be checked at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basicallyred in color. As driving distance in-creases, the fluid color turns darkish redgradually. It is a normal condition andyou should not judge the need to replacebased upon the changing color.You must replace the automatictransaxle fluid in accordance withintervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in section 5.

!

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended FluidYour Hyundai automatic transaxle isspecially designed to operate withHYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMONDATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brandsmeeting the SP III specification approvedby Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage causedby a nonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives maycause damage to the automatictransaxle.Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III orother brands meeting the SP III specifi-cation approved by Hyundai Motor Co..If you are having your vehicle servicedat a facility other than a Hyundai dealer,verify that the correct ATF is used foryour vehicle.

!

G110C01NF-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatictransaxle is:

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at normaloperating temperature. This means thatthe engine, radiator, radiator hose,exhaust system etc., are very hot.Exercise great care not to burn yourselfduring this procedure.

2.4L

3.3L

8.24 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters)

11.52 U.S. quarts (10.9 liters)


16

2. After the transaxle is warmed upsufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C(158~176°F), for example by 10 minutesusual driving, move the shift leverthrough all positions then place theselector lever in “N (Neutral) or P (Park)”position.

G110D03O-AAT

Checking the automatic transaxlefluid level

The automatic transaxle fluid level shouldbe checked regularly.Keep the vehicle on the level ground withthe parking brake applied and check thefluid level according to the followingprocedure.1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine isrunning at normal idle speed.

ONF078008

OHD076045N

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”range on the level gauge. If the fluidlevel is lower, add the specified fluidfrom the fill hole. If the fluid level ishigher, drain the fluid from the drainhole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in coldcondition (fluid temperature 20~30°C(68~86°F) add the fluid to “COLD” lineand then recheck the fluid levelaccording to the above step 2.


17CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. It will also damage yourvehicle's paint if spilled on it and notremoved immediately.

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when theengine is not running. Use extremecaution when working near the blades ofthe cooling fan so that you are not injuredby a rotating fan blade. As the enginecoolant temperature decreases, the fanwill automatically shut off. This is anormal condition.

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to thesafe operation of the car, it is suggestedthat they be checked and inspected byyour Hyundai dealer. The brakes shouldbe checked and inspected for wear atthose intervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in Section 5.

!

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoirshould be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"marks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, carefullyadd fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do notoverfill.

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conformingto DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in yourbraking system. Follow the instructionsprinted on the container.


18

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the sealsin the system, the air conditioning shouldbe run for at least 10 minutes each week.This is particularly important during coolweather when the air conditioning systemis not otherwise in use.

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to remainopen any longer than required. This willprevent entry of dirt and moisture whichcan damage the brake system and causeimproper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt,then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowlypour the recommended fluid into the res-ervoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace thecap on the reservoir and tighten.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

!

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (andengine radiator) should be checkedperiodically for accumulation of dirt, deadinsects, leaves, etc. These can interferewith maximum cooling efficiency. Whenremoving such accumulations, brush orhose them away carefully to avoid bendingthe cooling fans.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Op-eration

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idlefor several minutes with the airconditioning set at the maximum coldsetting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash ventsis not cold, have the air conditioningsystem inspected by your Hyundaidealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low re-frigerant level may damage thecompressor.

ONF078006


19

1. With the glove box open, remove thestoppers on both sides to allow theglove box to hang freely on the hinges.

ONF078014

CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-TROL AIR FILTER

G170100AFD

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads fora long period, the filter should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier. Whenyou replace the climate control air filter,replace it by performing the followingprocedure, and be careful to avoiddamaging other components.Replace the filter according to themaintenance Schedule.

ONF0780132. Remove the support rod.

ONF078015

Filter replacement


20

1.18 in.(30 mm)

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

To check the steering wheel free-play,stop the car with the wheels pointed straightahead and gently move the steering wheelback and forth. Use very light finger pressureand be sensitive to changes in resistancethat mark the limits of the free-play. If thefree-play is greater than specified, have itinspected by your Hyundai dealer andadjusted or repaired if necessary.

ONF078016

3. Remove the climate control air filtercase by pulling out the cover.

HNF50184. Replace the climate control air filter.5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

NOTE:When replacing the climate control airfilter install it in the same position as itwas installed. Otherwise, the systemmay produce noise and the effective-ness of the filter may be reduced.

ONF078037


21

G170A01A-AAT

BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine off, press down on thebrake pedal several times to reduce thevacuum in the brake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowlyon the brake pedal until you feel a changein resistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limitsspecified in the illustration above. If it is not,have it inspected by your Hyundai dealerand adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G160A01HR

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.(3 ~ 8 mm)

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

G180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brakepedal clearance. With the engine running,have your helper press down on the brakepedal several times and then hold it downwith a force of about 110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N).The brake pedal clearance is the distancefrom the top surface of the brake pedal tothe asphalt sheeting under the floor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not withinthe limits specified in the illustration, haveit inspected by your Hyundai dealer andadjusted or repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

2.95 in.(75 mm)

G160A01A-GAT

CLUTCH PEDAL

With the engine off, press lightly on theclutch pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the clutch pedal free-play. The free-play should be within thelimits specified in the illustration. If it is not,have it inspected by your Hyundai dealerand adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G160A01HR

0.24~0.51 in.(6~13 mm)


22

Drive belts should be checked periodi-cally for proper tension. At the same time,belts should be examined for cracks, wear,fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.When a new belt is replaced, the beltshould be located within the pulley of flatidler.Belt routing should also be checked to besure there is no interference between thebelts and other parts of the engine.

NOTE:Drive belt tension is adjusted automati-cally by the auto tensioner.

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuitsfrom the battery are ever overloaded, thuspreventing damage to the entire wiringharness. (This could be caused by a shortin the system drawing too much current.) Ifthis ever happens, have a Hyundai dealerdetermine the cause, repair the systemand replace the fusible link. The fusiblelinks are located in a relay box in theengine compartment for easy inspection.

ONF078020

G190A02NF-GAT

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G140D01NF

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

G140D02NF

Power steering pump

Compressor

Waterpump pully

Generator

Power steering

Compressor

Water pump pully

Generator

Damper pulley

Damper pulley

Auto tensioner

Auto tensioner


23

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Neveruse a piece of wire or a higher-ratedfusible link. This could result in seriousdamage and create a fire hazard.

G200B02NF

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing anew fuse of the same rating into place.The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not,have the fuse clip repaired or replacedby a Hyundai dealer. If you do not havea spare fuse, you may be able to borrowa fuse of the same or lower rating froman accessory you can temporarily getalong without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always rememberto replace the borrowed fuse.

G200B01NF-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

The fuse box for the lights and other elec-trical accessories will be found on the leftside of the instrument panel. Inside the boxyou will find a list showing the circuitsprotected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fusecould be the reason. If the fuse has burnedout, you will see that the metal strip insidethe fuse has burned through. If you suspecta blown fuse, follow this procedure:1. Turn off the ignition and all other

switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each

fuse. Remove each fuse by pulling ittoward you (a small "fuse puller" tool iscontained in the relay and fuse box ofthe engine room to simplify thisoperation).

ONF078018

3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even ifyou find one that appears to have burnedout.


24 CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! Whenworking with batteries, carefully observethe following precautions to avoidserious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poisonousand highly corrosive. Be careful not to spillit on yourself or the car. If you do spillbattery fluid on yourself, immediately dothe following:

ONF078017

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medicalassistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse outyour eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth saturatedwith water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milkof magnesia, eat a raw egg or drinkvegetable oil. Get medical assistanceas soon as possible.

While batteries are being charged (eitherby a battery charger or by the vehicle'sgenerator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to preventinjuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smokingin the area.

o Keep children away from the area.

!

G200B02L

Good Burned out

CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates that there isa problem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to aHyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair.Never replace a fuse with anythingexcept a fuse with the same or a loweramperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.

NOTE:See page 6-36 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.


25

!

G210B04A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence ofcorrosion around the battery posts orterminals should be removed using asolution of household baking soda andwarm water. After the battery terminals aredry, cover them with a light coating ofgrease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancer andreproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the state of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

!! WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-tery acid to contact your skin,eyes, clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes withclean water for at least 15 min-utes and get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with asponge or cloth until medicalattention is received.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medicalattention immediately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near a bat-tery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case maycause battery acid to leak, resulting inpersonal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppositecorners.

o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.

o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignitionswitched on.

WARNING:


26

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the powersteering hose connections for fluid leakageat those intervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should bereplaced if there is severe surface crack-ing, pulling, scuffing or worn spots.Deterioration of the hose could causepremature failure.

POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL

G230A01NF-AAT Recommended FluidUse PSF-4 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

ONF078007

The power steering fluid level should bechecked regularly. To check the powersteering fluid level, be sure the engine is"OFF", then check to make certain that thepower steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on thefluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately afterthe engine is started in extremely coldconditions (below - 4°F). If the noise stopsduring warm up, there is no abnormalfunction in the system. It is due to apower steering fluid characteristic inextremely cold conditions.

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when theengine is not running. Use extremecaution when working near the blades ofthe cooling fan, so that you are not injuredby a rotating fan blade. As the enginecoolant temperature decreases the fanwill automatically shut off. This is anormal condition.

G220B01NF-GAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come onautomatically if the engine coolanttemperature is high or whenever the airconditioning is in operation.


27FOR MORE INFORMATIONABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI

G250A01A-AAT

If you desire additional information aboutmaintaining and servicing your Hyundai,you may purchase a factory Shop Manualat your Hyundai dealer's parts department.This is the same manual used bydealership technicians and while it is highlytechnical it can be useful in obtaining abetter understanding of your car and howit works.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUST-MENT

G290A03O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment,make sure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct

pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and

press the front bumper & rear bumperdown several times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in.(3m) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (exceptfor full levels of coolant, engine oil andfuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools).Have the driver or equivalent weightplaced in driver's seat.

4. Clean the headlight lenses and turn onthe headlights (Low beam).

5. Open the hood.

G290A01NF-A

Verticalaiming

!

6. Draw a vertical line (through the centerof each headlight beam pattern) and ahorizontal line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) on theaiming screen measured from groundto center mark on headlight lens.

7. Adjust the right side of each cut-off lineof the low beam to the horizontal linewith a phillips screwdriver - VERTICALAIMING.

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the horizontalalignment of your headlights. Horizontalaiming must be adjusted by anauthorized Hyundai dealer to avoidincorrect alignment that will reduce theeffectiveness of your headlights.


28

SPECIFICATION:

"H"Horizontal center line of headlights fromground : 27.05 in. (687mm)

"W"Distance between each headlight center :51.5 in. (1,308mm)

"L"Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against :118.11 in. (3,000 mm)

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS

G260A02L-GAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb,be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"position.The next paragraph shows how to reachthe light bulbs so they may be changed. Besure to replace the burned-out bulb withone of the same number and wattagerating.See page 6-35 for the wattage descrip-tions.

! CAUTION:o Keep the lights out of contact with

petroleum products, such as oil,gasoline, etc.

o Be sure to replace the LED typeequipped bulbs with an assembly.

o After heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition iscaused by the temperature differencebetween the lamp inside and outside.This is similar to the condensation onyour windows inside your vehicleduring the rain and doesn’t indicate aproblem with your vehicle. If the waterleaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, havethe vehicle checked by an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer.

G290B01NF-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight Assem-bly Replacement

G290B01NF

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Ground line

Horizontal line

Vertical line

If the vehicle has had front body repair andthe headlight assembly has been replaced,the headlight aiming should be checkedusing the aiming screen as shown in theillustration. Turn on the headlight switch(Low Beam Position).1. Adjust headlights vertically so that cutoff

line is aligned with horizontal line shownin the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show thecenter of the headlights.


29

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eyeprotection.

2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its base, avoid

touching the glass.

G270A01NF-AAT

HEADLIGHT, FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT AND FRONT FOG LIGHT

Headlight and Front Turn SignalLight

ONF078024

Headlight (Low beam)

Turn signal light

Front position lightFront Fog Light

Headlight(High beam)

ONF078023N

4. Using a socket wrench of the correctsize, remove the headlight assemblymounting bolts and bumper mountingbolt.

HNF5024

5. Disconnect the power cord from theback of the headlight.


30

HNF5027

9. Remove the protective cap from thereplacement bulb and install the newbulb by matching the plastic base withthe headlight hole.

Low Beam

OMG075038N

HNF5025

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

ONF078026N

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

8. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise toremove the headlight bulb.


31

12. To replace the front turn signal lightbulb remove it from the bulb holderand install the new bulb.

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shatter,resulting in flying fragments. Alwayswear eye protection when servicing thebulb. Protect the bulb against abrasionsor scratches and against liquids whenlighted. Turn the bulb on only when in-stalling in a headlight. Replace the head-light if damaged or cracked. Keep thebulb out of the reach of children anddispose of the used bulb with care.

HNF5028-1

G270A03O

10. Use the protective cap and carton topromptly dispose of the old bulb.

11. Check for proper headlight aim.

Front Fog Light (If installed)

NOTE:It is recommended that the front fog lightbulb should be replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.


32

HNF5042

4. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunklid trim with a phillips screwdriver andremove the trunk lid trim.

5. To replace the rear combination light(back-up light and stop/tail light), re-move the socket by turning it counter-clockwise.

6. Install the new bulb.

3. To replace the rear combination light(stop/tail light, rear side marker lightand rear turn signal light), remove itfrom the bulb holder and install the newbulb.

(1) Stop/tail light(2) Rear side marker light(3) Rear turn signal light

HNF5030-A

G270D02NF-AAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

Stop/Tail Light, Rear Turn SignalLight, Back-up Light and Rear SideMarker Light

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the cover on the inside of therear luggage trim.

ONF078028


33

HNF5032

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HTB284

4. Replace with a new bulb.

G270C01L-AAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHT

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the luggage compartment lightcover on the rear package tray panelwith a flat-head screwdriver.

HNF5031-A


34

G270G01NF

G270L01L-AAT

MAP LIGHT

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.

G270G01L-AAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

HNF5034

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.

HNF5035

Screwdriver



35

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HJM5039

HTB284


G270K01L-AAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminated lightcover with a flat-head screwdriver.

ONF078039

G270G02NF


Screwdriver


36

Socket TypeBAY 15d

w2.1 x 9.5dBAY 15dsv6-7, 6BAY 15dBAY 15s

w2.1 x 9.5dw2.1 x 9.5d

No.1

234567

Socket TypeP x 26dP14,5s

BAY15dw2.1 x 9.5d

sv6-7,6PGJ13

w2.1 x 9.2dw2.1 x 4.6d

BULB WATTAGES

G280A01NF-AAT

G280A01NF-D

Part NameStop / Tail LightHigh Mounted Rear Stop LightTail LightLuggage Compartment LightRear Side Marker LightRear Turn Signal LightBack-up LightLicense Plate Light

Part NameHeadlight

Front Turn Signal LightMap LightInterior LightFront Fog LightFront Position Side Marker LightFront Door Edge Warning Light

No.89

101112131415

Wattage55552810102758

Low beamHigh beam

Wattage28/816

28/855

27165


37FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When youinspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HNF4005-1


38

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

HORNTAILECUIG1DRL

FR FOGA/CON

F/PUMPDIODE

ATMSTOP

H/LP LO RHS/ROOF

H/LP WASHERH/LP HI

ECUSNSR.3SNSR.1SNSR.2

B/UPIGN COILECU (IG1)H/LP LO

ABS

PROTECTED COMPONENTSABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connectorABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connectorFuse 23, 24, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35Defogger relayBlower relayPower window relay, Fuse 16Start relay, Ignition switch (IG2, START)Engine control unit relayPower connector 1/2, Fuse 21,22Ignition switch (ACC, IG1)Fusible Iink (ABS. 1, ABS. 2, RR HTD, BLOWER)Horn relayTail light relayPCM(Spare)Siren relay, DRL control moduleFront fog light relayA/C relayFuel pump relay(Spare)ATM control relayStop light switch(Spare)Sunroof control moduleHeadlight washer motorHeadlight relay (High)TCMA/C relay, Cooling fan relay, InjectorsMass air flow sensor, Crankshaft/Camshaft position sensor, Oil control valve, SMATRAOxygen sensor, Fuel pump relayBack up light switch, Pulse generator, Vehicle speed sensorIgnition coils, CondenserPCMHeadlight relay (Low)ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector

ABS.1ABS.2

I/P B+1RR HTDBLOWERP/WDWIGN.2

ECU RLYI/P B+2IGN.1ALT

FUSE RATING40A20A40A40A40A40A40A30A30A30A150A15A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A

-20A15A15A15A20A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A10A20A10A

DESCRIPTION

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE


39

PROTECTED COMPONENTSFUSE RATINGFUSESPARE 15A (Spare)SPARE 15A (Spare)ETACS 10A BCM(Body Control Module), Sunroof control module, Electronic chrome mirror, Rheostat

ESC 10A ESC module, Blower relayC/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette lighter

SPARE 15A (Spare)TAIL RH 10A Illumination lights, Right : License light (LH, RH), Rear combination light, Headlight, Glove box lightTAIL LH 10A Front fog light relay, Left : Rear combination light, HeadlightIONIZER 10A (Spare)

H/LP 10A DRL control module, Headlight relay, AQS and ambient sensorWIPER 25A Wiper and washerA/CON 10A A/C control moduleA/BAG 15A SRS control module, Passenger's Airbag switch

P/OUTLET 20A Front accessory socket, Rear power outletD/CLOCK 10A Digital clock, Audio, A/T shift lock control module, Power outside mirror and mirror folding, BCM

SAFETY PWR 25A Safety window moduleECS 15A (Spare)

ATM KEY LOCK 10A A/T shift lock control moduleP/WDW RR LH 25A Power window main switch, Left rear power window switch

P/WDW RH 30A Power window main switch, Right power window switch

Inner Panel


40

PROTECTED COMPONENTSFUSE RATINGFUSEP/AMP 20A Audio amp

DR LOCK 20A Door lock/unlock relayHAZARD 10A Hazard relay

P/SEAT RH 30A Power seat manual switch(RHD)A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster

T/SIG 10A Turn signal lightCLUSTER 10A BCM(Body Control Module), Instrument cluster, Yaw rate sensor, ESP switch, Seat warmer

AGCS 10A (Spare)START 10A Start relay

PEDAL ADJ 15A (Spare)ECS/RR FOG 15A Rear fog light relayT/LID OPEN 15A Trunk lid relay, Fuel filler door and trunk lid switch

S/HTR 15A Seat warmer switchP/SEAT LH 30A Power seat manual switch

SPORT MODE 10A Sport mode switch, Key solenoidMIRR HTD 10A A/C control module, Outside mirror and mirror folding motor

POWER CONNECTOR. 1 15A Audio

POWER CONNECTOR. 2 15ABCM(Body Control Module), Digital clock, Instrument cluster, A/C control module, Courtesy lights,Interior light

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEMS

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control Sys-tem

The positive crankcase ventilation systemis employed to prevent air pollution causedby blow-by gases being emitted from thecrankcase. This system supplies freshfiltered air to the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase, the freshair mixes with blow-by gases, which thenpass through the PCV valve into theinduction system.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tankare absorbed and stored in the onboardcanister. When the engine is running, thefuel vapors absorbed in the canister aredrawn into the surge tank through thepurge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve iscontrolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolanttemperature is low during idling, the PCSVcloses so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warms-upduring ordinary driving, the PCSV opensto introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission ControlSystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaining goodvehicle performance.

H010A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all emissionregulations.There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it isrecommended that you have your carinspected and maintained by an authorizedHyundai dealer in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Mainte-nance Test With Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, turn theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem off by pressing the ESC switch.

o After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-cluding ORVR: Onboard RefuelingVapor Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control Systemis designed to prevent fuel vapors fromescaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loadedinto a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuelvapors into the atmosphere.)

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3

!!

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

Hyundai vehicle is equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter toreduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained in theexhaust gas. Exhaust gases passingthrough the catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature. Theintroduction of large amounts of unburnedgasoline into the exhaust may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and createa fire hazard. This risk may be reduced byobserving the following:

Catalytic Converter

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalyticconverter temperatures can resultfrom improper operation of theelectrical, ignition or multiportelectronic fuel injection.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, oris hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the problemas soon as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may causethe engine to misfire and result indamage to the catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot.Shut off the engine, wait for at leastone hour before touching the cata-lytic converter or any other part of theexhaust system.

H020A01NF

o Remember that your Hyundai dealeris your best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over anycombustible material such as grass,paper, leaves or rags. These materialsmight contact the hot catalyticconverter and a fire might result.

WARNING:

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure ................................... 8-5Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-7All Season Tires ............................................................ 8-9Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-9Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-10Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-12Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-13Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13Consumer Information ................................................. 8-14Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17

88

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01O-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc. It can be found in threedifferent places on your car:

1. On the bulkhead between the engineand passenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrumentpanel where it can be seen by lookingdown through the windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillarouter panel.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacturer's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010A01NF-A ONF088003

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

ONF088004


3

ONF058022N

I030A03NF-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the driver's sidecenter pillar outer panel gives the coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle with the original tire size, thenumber of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

I030A01NF-A

ONF058021N

Type A

Type B


4

!

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

!NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.

WARNING:Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.

! WARNING:o Inspect your tires frequently for

proper inflation as well as wearand damage. Always use a tirepressure gauge.

o Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehiclecontrol, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. The recommendedcold tire pressure for your vehiclecan be found in this manual andon the tire label located on thedriver's side of the center pillar.

o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, showuneven wear, or are damaged. Seepage 8-11.

o Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Hyundai recom-mends that you check the spareevery time you check the pressureof the other tires on your vehicle.


5

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01NF-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1


6

o V: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Iden-tification Number. It indicates thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P215/60R16 94V)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.o Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two digit number (94): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.


7

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.


8

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same mold-ings on the other sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).


9

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

I050A04Y-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are the proper size andthat they are installed in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall,whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.


10

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

!I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

I060A02NF

! WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o If you have noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

o Don't use a tire chains on a vehicleequipped with aluminium wheels.If it is unavoidable use wire-typechains.

o Use wire chains less than 15mm toprevent damage to the chain's con-nection.


11

! WARNING:

To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accident causedby tire failure or loss of vehicle con-trol:o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-trol, and traction.

o Do not drive your vehicle with toolittle or too much pressure in yourtires. This can lead to unevenwear and tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias-ply tires on thesame car. You must replace alltires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.

HNF5015

I090A04JM-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc. The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

Tread wearindicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.


12

!!I090B02JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

o Using tires and wheel other thanthe recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle control,resulting in a serious accident.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sspecifications may fit poorly andresult in damage to the vehicle orunusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.

WARNING: WARNING:Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regardlessof the remaining tread, it is recom-mended that tires generally be re-placed after 6 years of normal ser-vice. Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading conditions canaccelerate the aging process. Fail-ure to follow this Warning can resultin sudden tire failure, which couldlead to a loss of control and anaccident involving serious injury ordeath.


13

!

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWrench bar (1)Jack (2)Wheel nut wrench (3)Tool receptacle (4)

7I100A01NF-A

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available fromyour authorized Hyundai dealer. It's writtenfor professional technicians, but is simpleenough formost mechanically-inclined owners to un-derstand.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

can cause poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents, inju-ries, and even death. Always checktires are properly inflated beforedriving. Refer to pages 2-23 and 8-3 for proper tire pressures andfurther information.

o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss of ve-hicle control, collisions, and in-jury and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soonas possible and should never beused for driving. Always checktire tread before driving your car.Refer to this page for further infor-mation and tread limits.

WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner’s Handbook& Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle’s specific warranty coverage.


14

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has beenprepared in accordance with regulationsissued by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles withinformation on uniform tire quality grading.Your Hyundai dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.


15

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

! WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed andmanufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urgeyou to read and follow all directions in thisOwner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings "NOTE","CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of yourvehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, NewHampshire, New Jersey, New York,Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont,Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151


16 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, NorthCarolina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkan-sas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Missis-sippi, Missouri, New Mexico, Oklahoma,Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wis-consin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Or-egon, Texas, Utah, Washington.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151


17

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court havingjurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

BINDING ARBITRATION(U.S.A only)

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A03NF-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J060A01NF-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01NF-AAT

POWER STEERING

J030A03NF-AAT

TIRE in.(mm)

Fuel tank capacity17.7us.gal (14.7 imp.gal, 67 liter)

18.5 us.gal (15.4 imp.gal, 70 liter)*

ITEM

J050A01NF-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Disc type

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.90 in. (150 mm)

Vane type

2.4L/3.3L

189.9 (4800)

72.0 (1830)

58.0 (1475)

107.4 (2730)

61.61 (1565)

61.02 (1550)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Inflation Pressure

32PSI (220kPa)

60PSI (420kPa)

Type

Full

Temporary

Size

P215/60R16

P215/55R17

T125/80D16

* : if installed

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

3.3L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.62 x 3.29 (92.0 x 83.8)

203.9 (3,342)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

620 ± 100

BTDC 10° ± 5°

0.006 ~ 0.009 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.01 ~ 0.012 in. (0.27 ~ 0.33 mm)

2.4L

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC

3.46 x 3.81 (88 x 97)

143.9(2,359)

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

650 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

ENGINE

J070A02NF-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in.(mm)

Displacement cu.in.(cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (cold engine) Intake

Exhaust

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (Base)

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL

or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

ILSAC GF-3 SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))

or ABOVE

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

PSF-4 TYPE FLUID

DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A04NF-AAT

Quantity (Us. qts)(Liter)

Drain and refill;

2.4L : 4.54 (4.3) (With oil filter)

3.3L : 5.49 (5.2) (With/Without oil

filter)

1.8 (1.75)

2.4L : 10.0 (9.5)

3.3L : 11.52 (10.9)

2.4L : 6.87 (6.5)

2.4L : 6.66 (6.3)

3.3L : 8.66 (8.2)

0.95 (0.9)

1.0 (0.9)

Item

Engine Oil

Recommends

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steering

Brake and clutch fluid

Manual Transaxle

Automatic Transaxle

Manual

Automatic

10

INDEX

10

10 INDEX

2

AAdvanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System(SRS) .................................................................................. 1-34

Curtain airbag ................................................................. 1-45Driver's and passenger's front airbag ............................ 1-35Occupant classification system ...................................... 1-40Side impact airbag ......................................................... 1-44

Air Cleaner Filter ................................................................ 6-11Air Conditioning

Care ................................................................................. 6-18Operation ............................................................ 1-101, 6-18Switch ............................................................................ 1-101

Antenna ............................................................................ 1-110Audio System

Audio remote control switch ........................................... 1-94CD (PA710S) ................................................................ 1-119CDC (PA760S) ............................................................. 1-131Radio, Set up, Volume control (PA710S, PA760S)........................................................................... 1-115, 1-128Running i-Pod (PA710S, PA760S) .................. 1-125, 1-139Using USB (PA710S, PA760S) ........................ 1-123, 1-135

Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ............ 1-104Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and HomeLink® ...................................................................................... 1-77

BBattery ................................................................................. 6-24Binding Arbitration ............................................................. 8-17Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................... 2-12Checking the brakes ...................................................... 6-17Fluid ................................................................................. 6-17Pedal clearance .............................................................. 6-21Pedal free-play ............................................................... 6-20Practices .......................................................................... 2-15

Breaking-In your New Hyundai ........................................... 1-3

CCalifornia Perchlorate Notice ............................................ 5-10Care of Discs .................................................................... 1-114Catalytic Converter ............................................................... 7-3Center Console Compartment ........................................... 1-74Child Restraint System ...................................................... 1-26

Installing a child restraint system with "Tether Anchorage" system ........................................... 1-28Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system ............................................................. 1-29

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock .......................................... 1-6Cigarette Lighter ................................................................ 1-66Climate Control Air Fiter ........................................ 1-109, 6-19Clock ................................................................................... 1-66Clutch

Pedal free-play ............................................................... 6-21

10INDEX

3

Combination LightAuto Light ........................................................................ 1-62Headlight flasher ............................................................ 1-62Headlight switch ............................................................. 1-61High-beam switch ........................................................... 1-62Lane change signal ........................................................ 1-61Parking light auto off ...................................................... 1-61Turn signal operation ..................................................... 1-60

Consumer Information ....................................................... 8-14Cooling Fans ...................................................................... 6-26Corrosion protection

Cleaning the interior ......................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .......................... 4-2Washing and waxing ........................................................ 4-3

Cruise Control .................................................................... 1-91

DDay/night Inside Rearview Mirror ...................................... 1-76Defrosting/Defogging ....................................................... 1-103Door

Central door locks ............................................................ 1-6Door locks ......................................................................... 1-4Front door warning light ................................................. 1-90Locking and unlocking front door with a key .................. 1-5

Drink Holder ....................................................................... 1-67Driving

Economical driving ......................................................... 2-16Smooth cornering ........................................................... 2-17Winter driving .................................................................. 2-17

EElectronic Stability Control (ESC) System ........................ 2-13Emission Control System ..................................................... 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine ................................................ 2-3Compartment (2.4 DOHC) ................................................ 6-2Compartment (3.3 V6) ...................................................... 6-3Coolant .............................................................................. 6-8Coolant temperature gauge ........................................... 1-55If the engine overheats ..................................................... 3-4Number ............................................................................. 8-2Oil ...................................................................................... 6-4Starting .............................................................................. 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! .................................. 2-2

FFan Speed Control ................................................. 1-97, 1-107Fog Light

Front ................................................................................ 1-63Front Seats

Active headrests ............................................................. 1-16Adjustable front seats ..................................................... 1-14Adjustable headrests ...................................................... 1-15Adjusting seat forward and rearward .................. 1-14, 1-18Adjusting seatback angle ..................................... 1-15, 1-18Power driver's seat ......................................................... 1-17Seat cushion height adjustment ......................... 1-17, 1-18Seat warmer .................................................................... 1-19

10 INDEX

4

FuelCapacity ............................................................................ 9-2Gauge .............................................................................. 1-55Recommendations ............................................................ 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release .............................................................. 1-85

Fuse Panel Description ..................................................... 6-37Fuses .................................................................................. 6-22

GGeneral Checks ................................................................... 6-4Glove Box ........................................................................... 1-73

HHazard Warning System .................................................... 1-65Headlight

Aiming adjustment .......................................................... 6-27Replacement ................................................................... 6-28Switch .............................................................................. 1-61

Heating and Cooling Control ............................................ 1-96Heating and Ventilation

Air flow control ................................................... 1-98, 1-108Air intake control switch ..................................... 1-99, 1-107Bi-level heating ............................................................. 1-100Defrosting/Defogging .................................................... 1-103Fan speed control (Blower Control) .................. 1-97, 1-107Temperature control ....................................................... 1-97

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................... 1-85Hood Release .................................................................... 1-87Horn .................................................................................... 1-90

IIgnition Switch ...................................................................... 2-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ............................ 1-48Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................... 1-66Interior Light ....................................................................... 1-72Intermittent Wiper ............................................................... 1-64

JJump Starting ....................................................................... 3-3

KKey ........................................................................................ 1-3

If you lose your keys ...................................................... 3-18Positions ............................................................................ 2-3

LLight Bulb Watages ............................................................ 6-36Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................. 6-28Lubrication Chart .................................................................. 9-4

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................ 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ................. 5-6Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 5-4Service requirements ........................................................ 5-2

MirrorsDay/night inside rearview ............................................... 1-76Homelink mirror .............................................................. 1-77Outside rearview ............................................................. 1-75Outside rearview mirror heater ...................................... 1-76

10INDEX

5

Multi Box ............................................................................. 1-74

OOdometer ............................................................................ 1-56Outside Rearview Mirror .................................................... 1-75

PParking Brake ..................................................................... 1-83Power Adjustable Pedals .................................................. 2-12Power Outlets ..................................................................... 1-67Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................... 6-26

RRear Seat

Armrest ............................................................................ 1-91Folding rear seatbacks ................................................... 1-20Warning ........................................................................... 1-20

Rear Window Defroster Switch ......................................... 1-65Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 8-16

SSeat

Front ................................................................................ 1-14Rear ................................................................................. 1-20

Seat Belts3-Point system ................................................................ 1-24Adjusting your seat belt .................................................. 1-26Care of seat belts ........................................................... 1-23Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................... 1-32Precautions ..................................................................... 1-21

Seatback Pocket ................................................................ 1-68

Speedometer ...................................................................... 1-56Starting Procedure ............................................................... 2-5Steering Wheel

Free-play ......................................................................... 6-20Tilt and telescopic type ................................................... 1-89Tilt type ............................................................................ 1-89

Stereo Sound System ...................................................... 1-112Sunglass Holder ................................................................ 1-73Sun Visor ............................................................................ 1-88Sunroof ............................................................................... 1-69

TTachometer ......................................................................... 1-56Theft-Alarm System .............................................................. 1-8Tires

All season tires ................................................................. 8-9Balancing ........................................................................ 8-10Chains ............................................................................... 8-9Changing a flat tire ......................................................... 3-10Checking the inflation pressure ....................................... 8-4If you have a flat tire ....................................................... 3-10Information ........................................................................ 8-2Maintenance ................................................................... 8-12Pressure ............................................................................ 8-3Replacement ................................................................... 8-11Rotation ........................................................................... 8-10Sidewall labeling .............................................................. 8-5Snow tires ......................................................................... 8-9Spare tire .......................................................................... 3-9Terminology and definitions ............................................. 8-7Traction ........................................................................... 8-11

10 INDEX

6

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ........................................................ 2-20Emergency ...................................................................... 3-17If your vehicle must be towed ........................................ 3-15

TransaxleAutomatic .......................................................................... 2-8Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-15Manual .............................................................................. 2-6Manual transaxle oil checking ....................................... 6-14

Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-58Trip Odometer .................................................................... 1-57Trunk Lid ............................................................................ 1-84

VVehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-23Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1

WWarning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-50Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-13Windows

Power .............................................................................. 1-11Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................... 1-63

Intermittent wiper operation ............................................ 1-64Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-64Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-64

Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................. 6-12

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

ORIGINAL OWNER _____________________________________________________

ADDRESS

CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)

DEALER NAME _______________ DEALER NO. _____________________________

ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________

CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________

EN hma cover.qxd 11/27/2006 5:07 PM Page 3

owner's manual operation maintenance...

Documents